Sunteți pe pagina 1din 103

DVP-NS700P

RMT-D129A

SERVICE MANUAL

US Model Canadian Model

SPECIFICATIONS
System
Laser Signal format system Semiconductor laser NTSC

General
Power requirements Power consumption Dimensions (approx.) Mass (approx.) Operating temperature Operating humidity 120V AC, 60 Hz 15 W 430 74 256 mm (17 3 101/8 in.) (w/h/d) incl. projecting parts 2.7 kg (5 lb) 5 C to 35 C (41 F to 95 F) 25 % to 80 %

Audio characteristics
Frequency response DVD (PCM 96 kHz): 2 Hz to 44 kHz (1.0 dB) DVD (PCM 48 kHz): 2 Hz to 22 kHz (0.5 dB) CD: 2 Hz to 20 kHz (0.5 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio (S/N ratio) 115 dB (LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks only) Harmonic distortion 0.003 % Dynamic range DVD: 103 dB CD: 99 dB Wow and flutter Less than detected value (0.001% W PEAK) The signals from LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks are measured. When you play PCM sound tracks with a 96 kHz sampling frequency, the output signals from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL and OPTICAL) jacks are converted to 48 kHz sampling frequency.

Supplied accessories Check that you have the following items: Audio/video cord (pinplug 3 y pinplug 3) (1) Remote commander (remote) RMT-D129A (1) Size AA (R6) batteries (2) Component video cord (pinplug 3 y pinplug 3) (1) Specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

Outputs
Jack name Jack type Maximum output level 2 Vrms (at 50 kilohms) -18 dBm 0.5 Vp-p 1.0 Vp-p Luminance signal: 1.0 Vp-p Color signal: 0.286 Vp-p Y: 1.0 Vp-p PB, PR: 0.7 Vp-p Load impedance Over 10 kilohms Wave length: 660 nm 75 ohms terminated 75 ohms, sync negative 75 ohms, sync negative 75 ohms terminated 75 ohms, sync negative 75 ohms

ENERGY STARR is a U.S. registered mark. As an ENERGY STARR Partner, Sony Corporation has determined that this product meets the ENERGY STARR guidelines for energy efficiency.

LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) (1/2) Phono jack DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) LINE OUT (VIDEO) (1/2) S VIDEO OUT (1/2) COMPONENT VIDEO OUT(Y, PB, PR) Optical output jack Phono jack Phono jack 4-pin mini DIN Phono jack

CD/DVD PLAYER

SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer: 1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges. 2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are pinched or contact high-wattage resistors. 3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. 4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement. 5. Check the line cord for cracks and abrasion. Recommend the replacement of any such line cord to the customer. 6. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified. 7. Check the antenna terminals, metal trim, metallized knobs, screws, and all other exposed metal parts for AC leakage. Check leakage as described below. LEAKAGE TEST The AC leakage from any exposed metal part to earth ground and from all exposed metal parts to any exposed metal part having a return to chassis, must not exceed 0.5 mA (500 microamperes). Leakage current can be measured by any one of three methods. 1. A commercial leakage tester, such as the Simpson 229 or RCA WT-540A. Follow the manufacturers' instructions to use these instruments. 2. A battery-operated AC milliammeter. The Data Precision 245 digital multimeter is suitable for this job. 3. Measuring the voltage drop across a resistor by means of a VOM or battery-operated AC voltmeter. The limit indication is 0.75V, so analog meters must have an accurate lowvoltage scale. The Simpson 250 and Sanwa SH-63Trd are examples of a passive VOM that is suitable. Nearly all battery operated digital multimeters that have a 2V AC range are suitable. (See Fig. A)

To Exposed Metal Parts on Set

0.15 F

1.5 k

AC voltmeter (0.75 V)

Earth Ground

Fig. A. Using an AC voltmeter to check AC leakage.

WARNING!! WHEN SERVICING, DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY. IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION, BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORE THAN 25 cm FROM THE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK-UP BLOCK.

CAUTION: The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard.

CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT LA SCURIT! LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PICES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SCURIT DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PICES SONY DONT LES NUMROS SONT DONNS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPLMENTS PUBLIS PAR SONY.

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!! COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section Title Page Section Title Page
4-33 4-35 4-37 4-39 4-41 4-43 4-45

Service Note ............................................................................ 4

1.

GENERAL
Getting Started .............................................................. Hookups ........................................................................ Playing Discs ................................................................. Searching for a Scene ................................................... Viewing Information About the Disc .............................. Sound Adjustments ....................................................... Enjoying Movies ............................................................ Using Various Additional Functions .............................. Settings and Adjustments ............................................. Additional Information ................................................... 1-3 1-4 1-6 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 1-14 1-16 1-18

AV-58 Printed Wiring Board .......................................... AV-58 (VIDEO BUFFER) Schematic Diagram .............. AV-58 (AUDIO AMP) Schematic Diagram .................... IF-83 Printed Wiring Board ........................................... IF-83 (IF CON) Schematic Diagram ............................. HS13S0U Printed Wiring Board .................................... HS13S0U Schematic Diagram ......................................

5.
5-1.

IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION


System Control Pin Function (MB-100 Board IC103) .................................................. 5-1

6.
6-1. 6-2. 6-3. 6-4. 6-5. 6-6. 6-7. 6-8. 6-9. 6-10. 6-11.

TEST MODE
General Description ...................................................... Starting Test Mode ........................................................ Syscon Diagnosis .......................................................... Drive Auto Adjustment .................................................. Drive Manual Operation ................................................ Mecha Aging ................................................................. Emergency History ........................................................ Version Information ....................................................... Video Level Adjustment ................................................ IF CON Self Diagnostic Function .................................. Troubleshooting ............................................................. 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-5 6-7 6-10 6-10 6-11 6-11 6-11 6-18

2.
2-1. 2-2. 2-3. 2-4. 2-5. 2-6. 2-7. 2-8. 2-9. 2-10. 2-11. 2-12. 2-13. 2-14.

DISASSEMBLY
Case Removal ............................................................... AV-58 Board Removal ................................................... MB-100 Board Removal ................................................ Tray Cover Removal ...................................................... Front Panel Removal ..................................................... Power Block Removal ................................................... RM-85 Board Removal .................................................. Mechanism Deck Removal ........................................... IF-83 Board Removal .................................................... Tray Removal ................................................................. Loading Motor (M001), MS-81 Board Removal ............ Optical Pick-up Removal ............................................... Internal Views ................................................................ Circuit Boards Location ................................................. 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-5

7.
7-1. 1. 7-2. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 7-3.

ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT
Power Supply Check ..................................................... HS13S0U Boards .......................................................... Adjustment of Video System ......................................... Video Level Adjustment ................................................ Progressive Video Level Adjustment ............................ Checking S Video Output S-Y ....................................... Checking S Video Output S-C ....................................... Checking Component Video Output Y .......................... Checking Component Video Output B-Y ...................... Checking Component Video Output R-Y ...................... Adjustment Related Parts Arrangement ....................... 7-1 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-4

3.
3-1. 3-2. 3-3. 3-4. 3-5. 3-6. 3-7. 3-8. 3-9.

BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Overall Block Diagram ................................................... RF/Servo Block Diagram ............................................... Signal Processor Block Diagram .................................. System Control Block Diagram ..................................... Video Block Diagram ..................................................... Audio Block Diagram ..................................................... Interface Control Block Diagram ................................... Power 1 Block Diagram ................................................. Power 2 Block Diagram ................................................. 3-1 3-3 3-5 3-7 3-9 3-11 3-13 3-15 3-17

8.

REPAIR PARTS LIST


8-1 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4

4.

PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS


Frame Schematic Diagram ............................................ Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams ......... MS-81 (LOADING), RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) Printed Wiring Board and Schematic Diagram ............. MB-100 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... MB-100 (RF AMP, SERVO) Schematic Diagram .......... MB-100 (ARP, SERVO DSP) Schematic Diagram ........ MB-100 (AV DECODER) Schematic Diagram .............. MB-100 (BNR) Schematic Diagram .............................. MB-100 (DRIVE) Schematic Diagram .......................... MB-100 (SYSTEM CONTROL) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... MB-100 (CLOCK GENERATOR) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... MB-100 (AUDIO DSP, D/A CONVERTER) Schematic Diagram ....................................................... MB-100 (GATE ARRAY) Schematic Diagram ............... MB-100 (I/P CONVERTER) Schematic Diagram ......... 4-3 4-5

4-1. 4-2.

8-1. Exploded Views ............................................................. 8-1-1. Case Assembly ........................................................ 8-1-2. Chassis Assembly .................................................... 8-1-3. Mechanism Deck Assembly ..................................... 8-2. Electrical Parts List .......................................................

4-5 4-7 4-11 4-13 4-15 4-17 4-19 4-21 4-23 4-25 4-27 4-29

SERVICE NOTE
1. DISASSEMBLY
This set can be disassembled in the order shown below.

Set

Case (Page 2-1)

AV-58 Board (Page 2-1)

Tray Cover (Page 2-1)

MB-100 Board (Page 2-1)

Mechanism Deck (Page 2-2)

Front Panel (Page 2-2)

Tray (Page 2-3)

Optical Pick-up (Page 2-3)

IF-83 Board (Page 2-3)

Power Block (Page 2-2)

RM-85 Board (Page 2-2)

Loading Motor (M001), MS-81 Board (Page 2-3)

2. DISC REMOVAL PROCEDURE (at POWER OFF)


1) Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of the arrow A. (See Fig. 1) 2) Draw out the tray in the direction of the arrow B, and remove a disc. (See Fig. 1)
Aperture

1) Remove the case from the set. (Refer to 2-1) 2) Remove the rear panel as shown in Fig. 2.

6 Rear panel

2 Two connectors (CN101, 202) 5 Boss

3 Screw (B3)

Lever of chuck cam

B Tray

4 Boss

1 Two flexible flat cables (FMAV-003: CN102/FMA-029: CN203)

Fig. 2 Fig. 1
3) Remove the MB-100 board. (Refer to 2-3) 4) Set the rear panel as shown in Fig. 3.
Rear panel

3.

HOW TO SERVICE MB-100 BOARD

Jig (J-6090-107-A) Extension cable


5 Two connectors (CN101, 202) 2 Boss

4 Screw (B3)

Stand (with CK-106 Board) CK-105 board

3 Boss

Fig. 3
Eight flexible flat cables FFC 5P, FFC 9P, FFC 15P, FFC26 P, FFC 9P (DVP-NS500P/NS700P), FFC 15P (DVP-NS400D), FFC 25P (EXCEPT DVP-NS300 J model), FFC 29P (DVP-NS300 J model)

5) Set the stand (with CK-106 board) as shown in Fig. 4.


1 MB-100 board

8) Set the MB-100 board as shown in Fig. 7, Fig. 8.

4 Two screws (B3)

1 Flexible flat cable (FFC9P: CN102)

2 Connector (FFC9P: CN902)

3 Flexible flat cable (FFC25P: CN203)

3 Connector (CN101)

MB-100 board

2 Stand (with CK-106 board)

4 Connector (FFC25P: CN801)

Fig. 4 Fig. 7
6) Set the CK-105 board as shown in Fig. 5.
1 CK-105 board

4 Connector (CN109)

3 Claw

Fig. 5
7) Set the four flexible flat cables as shown in Fig. 6.
1 Three flexible flat cables (FFC26P: CN201/ FFC9P: CN202/ FFC5P: CN402)

2 Three connectors (FFC26P: CN102/ FFC9P: CN104/ FFC5P: CN106)

Fig. 8

4 Connector (FFC15P: CN110) 3 Flexible flat cable (FFC15P: CN201)

Fig. 6

5. CONNECTION OF SERVICE JIG

AV-58 CN102 FFC9P CK-105 FFC26P (Used the set) FFC 9P (Used the set) Mechanism deck FFC 5P (Used the set) FFC26P FFC 9P FFC 5P CN902 CN102 CN104 CN106 CN201 CN202 CN402 CN101 B to B Connector 15P CN202 CN201 CK-106 (Stand) MB-100 CN203 FFC25P CN801

CN101 CN103 CN105

B to B Connector 15P CN403 IF-83 CN109 CN110

FFC15P

DVP-NS700P SECTION 1 GENERAL


About this Manual
Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote. You can also use the controls on the player if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote. The meaning of the icons used in this manual is described below:
Icon Meaning Functions available in DVD video mode Functions available in VIDEO CD mode Icon Meaning Functions available in music CD mode

This section is extracted from instruction manual (3-068-059-11).

Region code
Your player has a region code printed on the back of the unit and will only play DVDs labeled with identical region codes. DVDs labeled will also play on this player. If you try to play any other DVD, the message Playback prohibited by area limitations. will appear on the TV screen. Depending on the DVD, no region code indication may be labeled even though playing the DVD is prohibited by area restrictions.
X
MODEL NO.

Note
Some CD-Rs or CD-RWs cannot be played on this player depending upon the recording quality or physical condition of the disc, or the characteristics of the recording device. Furthermore, the disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalized. For more information, see the operating instructions for the recording device.

Notes about the Discs


On handling discs To keep the disc clean, handle the disc by its edge. Do not touch the surface.

ALL

Note on playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs


Some playback operations of DVDs and VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers. Since this player plays DVDs and VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed, some playback features may not be available. Also, refer to the instructions supplied with the DVDs or VIDEO CDs. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts, or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car. After playing, store the disc in its case. On cleaning Before playing, clean the disc with a cleaning cloth. Wipe the disc from the center out.

More convenient features

Region code

DVPXXXX

CD/DVD PLAYER AC 00V 00Hz NO. 00W


SONY CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 0-000-000-00

Example of discs that the player cannot play

Copyrights
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents, other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation, and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

This Player Can Play the Following Discs


Format of discs
DVD VIDEO

The player cannot play the following discs: CD-ROMs (PHOTO CDs included) All CD-Rs other than music and VCD format CD-Rs Data part of CD-Extras DVD-ROMs DVD Audio discs HD layer on SACDs Also, the player cannot play the following discs: A DVD with a different region code (page 79). A disc recorded in a color system other than NTSC, such as PAL or SECAM (this player conforms to the NTSC color system). A disc that has a non-standard shape (e.g., card, heart). A disc with paper or stickers on it. A disc that has the adhesive of cellophane tape or a sticker still left on it.

VIDEO CD

Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, commercially available cleaners, or anti-static spray intended for vinyl LPs.

Music CD

The DVD VIDEO logo is a trademark.

Index to Parts and Controls


For more information, refer to the pages indicated in parentheses.

Front Panel Display


When playing back a DVD
Disc type Playing status Current chapter (45)
TITLE CHAP HOUR MIN SEC

Front Panel
DVD
PGM SHUFFLE DTS ANGLE REPEAT1 Digital A-B

JOG PUSH ENTER PROGRESSIVE SCAN TITLE

Current audio signal (50)

Current play mode (34)

Current title (45)

Playing time (45)

POWER

DVD MENU

ON

OFF BNR SURROUND

RETURN

DISPLAY

Lights up when you can change the angle (53)

When playing back a VIDEO CD (PBC)


Playing status
MIN A-B PBC SEC

Disc type

A 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

POWER switch/indicator (29) PROGRESSIVE indicator (70) Disc tray (29) A (open/close) button (29) ./> (previous/next) buttons (30) C/X/x/c/ ENTER buttons (25) JOG button/indicator (40) TITLE button (32) DVD MENU button (32)

O RETURN button (33) DISPLAY button (12) Click shuttle (40) x (stop) button (29) X (pause) button (30) H (play) button (29) Front panel display (9) SURROUND button/indicator (51) BNR (Block Noise Reduction) button/ indicator (55) ql (remote sensor) (15) q; qa qs qd qf qg qh qj qk

VIDEO CD CD

Current play mode (34)

Current scene (45)

Playing time (45)

Lights up when playing back a VIDEO CD with PBC (33)

When playing back a CD or VIDEO CD (without PBC)


Playing status

VIDEO CD CD
PGM SHUFFLE REPEAT1 A-B

TRACK

INDEX

MIN

SEC

Disc type

Current play mode (34)

Current track and index (45)

Playing time (45)

continued

1-1

Rear Panel

Remote

1
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 1 2 R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2 PR Y
PROGRESSIVE INTERLACE SELECTABLE

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

A B C D 5 6 7 H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z wj wk wl e;

4 7

COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

PB

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT OUT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

1 DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL) jack (22) (23) (24) 2 DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL) jack (22) (23) (24) 3 LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks (16) (21) (22) (23) 4 LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks (16) (18)

5 S VIDEO OUT 1/2 jacks (18) 6 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks (18) 7 VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT switch (70)

Z OPEN/CLOSE button (30) Number buttons CLEAR button (34) ANGLE button (53) AUDIO button (49) PROGRAM button (34) SHUFFLE button (36) ./> PREV/NEXT buttons (30) c / C SEARCH/STEP buttons (39) H PLAY button (29) TITLE button (32) DISPLAY button (34) TV/DVD switch (64) [/1 (on/standby) button (29) BNR (Block Noise Reduction) button (55) TV/VIDEO button (64) VOL +/ buttons (64) ENTER button SUBTITLE button (54) TIME/TEXT button (45) REPEAT button (36) INSTANT REPLAY button (30) SURROUND button (51) / y SCAN/SLOW buttons (39) X PAUSE button (30) x STOP button (29) DVD MENU button (32) C/X/x/c buttons (25) ENTER button (25) O RETURN button (33)

10

Guide to the Control Menu Display


Use the Control Menu to select a function that you would like to use. The Control Menu display appears when the DISPLAY button is pressed. For details, please refer to the page in parentheses.

TVS (TV Virtual Surround Sound) (page 51)

Lets you enjoy surround sound effects by using sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of your stereo TVs internal speakers. Checks the information (bit rate or layer) on the disc while playing a DVD. Sets the disc to prohibit playing. QUICK Setup (page 25) Use Quick Setup to choose the desired language of the on screen display, the shape of the TV screen, and the audio output. CUSTOM Setup In addition to the Quick Setup setting, you can adjust the image and sound quality, Parental Control, and other various settings. RESET Returns the settings in SETUP to the default setting. Selects the title, the chapter, or the track to play a disc in the order you want. Plays the title, the chapter, or the track in random order. Plays the entire disc (all titles/all tracks) repeatedly or one title/chapter/track repeatedly. Specifies the parts you want to play repeatedly. Adjusts the picture quality by reducing the block noise or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen. Adjusts the video signal of the DVD or VIDEO CD from the player. You can adjust each element of the picture, such as the HUE and BRIGHTNESS. Exaggerates the outline of the image to produce a sharper picture.

ADVANCED (DVD only) (page 48) CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL (page 59)

Control Menu
Total number of titles or tracks recorded Currently playing title number (Video CD/CD: track number) Currently playing chapter number (Video CD: index number) Playing time Icon of selected Control Menu item Control Menu items Total number of chapters or indexes recorded Playback status (N Playback, X Pause, x Stop, etc.)

SETUP (page 67)

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH OFF 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH SUBTITLE Select:

PLAY DVD

Type of disc being played back Current setting

Options

Function name of selected Control Menu item Operation message

PROGRAM (page 34)


ENTER

Cancel: RETURN

SHUFFLE (page 36) REPEAT (page 36)

List of Control Menu Items Selects the title (DVD), the scene (VIDEO CD TITLE (DVD only) (page 41)/ in PBC playback) or the track (VIDEO CD) to SCENE (only VIDEO CD in PBC playback) (page 41)/TRACK (VIDEO CD be played. only) (page 41) CHAPTER (DVD only) (page 41)/INDEX (VIDEO CD only) (page 41) TRACK (CD only) (page 41) INDEX (CD only) (page 41) TIME/TEXT (page 41) Selects the chapter (DVD) or the index (VIDEO CD) to be played. Selects the track (CD) to be played. Selects the index (CD) to be played. Checks the elapsed time and the remaining playback time. Input the time code for picture and music searching. Displays the DVD or the CD text. Changes the audio setting. Displays the subtitles. Changes the subtitle language. Changes the angle.

A-B REPEAT (page 37) BNR (page 55)

VIDEO EQUALIZER (DVD/ VIDEO CD only) (page 56)

DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (DVD/VIDEO CD only) (page 58)

AUDIO (page 49) SUBTITLE (DVD only) (page 54) ANGLE (DVD only) (page 53)

VIEWER (DVD/VIDEO CD only) Divides the screen into 9 sub-screens to help you find the scene you want quickly. (page 43)

12

1-2

11

continued

13

Getting Started

z Each time you press DISPLAY, the Control Menu display changes as follows:
, Control Menu display 1 m Control Menu display 2 (The items except the first three items from the top are changed to other items.) m ADVANCED display (Appears if you select any setting other than OFF. See page 48.) m Control Menu display off You can display the Control Menu display 1 only during CD playback. The Control Menu items are different depending on the disc.

Quick Overview
A quick overview presented in this chapter will give you enough information to start using the player for your enjoyment. To use the surround sound features of this player, refer to Hookups on page 18.

Getting Started

Note
You cannot connect this player to a TV that does not have a video input jack. Be sure to turn off the power of each component before connecting.

z The Control Menu icon indicator lights up in green

when you select any item except

OFF. (TVS, PROGRAM, SHUFFLE, REPEAT, A-B REPEAT, BNR, DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER only). The ANGLE indicator lights up in green only when the angles can be changed. The VIDEO EQUALIZER indicator lights up in green when any setting other than STANDARD is selected.

Step 1: Unpacking
Check that you have the following items: Audio/video cord (pinplug 3 y pinplug 3) (1) Remote commander (remote) RMT-D129A (1) Size AA (R6) batteries (2) Component video cord (pinplug 3 y pinplug 3) (1)

Step 2: Inserting Batteries into the Remote


You can control the player using the supplied remote. Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the 3 and # ends on the batteries to the markings inside the compartment. When using the remote, point it at the remote sensor on the player.

Notes
Do not leave the remote in an extremely hot or humid place. Do not drop any foreign object into the remote casing, particularly when replacing the batteries. Do not expose the remote sensor to direct light from the sun or a lighting apparatus. Doing so may cause a malfunction. If you do not use the remote for an extended period of time, remove the batteries to avoid possible damage from battery leakage and corrosion.

14

15

Step 3: TV Hookups
Connect the supplied audio/video cord and power cord in the order (1~3) shown below. Be sure to connect the power cord last. 1 Audio/video cord (supplied)
to video input
INPUT
VIDEO

Step 4: Playing a Disc


1 Turn on the TV. 2 Switch the input selector on the TV to the player. Getting Started
(yellow) (white) (red)

L AUDIO R

to audio input TV to LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1 to LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1

R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1

With the playback side facing down


R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2

3 Press POWER on the player.


LINE OUT

2 Power source
CD/DVD Player

4 Press A on the player to open the disc tray. 5 Place the disc on the tray with the playback side facing down.

R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 1 2 R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2 PR Y


PROGRESSIVE INTERLACE SELECTABLE

COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

PB

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT OUT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

6 Press H.
The disc tray closes and the player begins playing the disc.
3 Power source

l: Signal flow

When connecting to a wide screen TV Depending on the disc, the image may not fit your TV screen. If you want to change the aspect ratio, please refer to page 69. When connecting to a TV that accepts progressive (480p) format signals You need to use the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks to view progressive signals. Hook up your TV using pattern C on page 18, and then run Quick Setup on page 25.

After Step 6 Depending on the disc, a menu may be displayed on the TV screen. If so, select the item you want from the menu and play the DVD (page 32) or VIDEO CD disc (page 33). To stop playing Press x. To take out the disc Press A. To turn off the player Press [/1 on the remote. The player is set to standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. Press POWER on the player to turn off completely.

16

17

1-3

Hookups

Hooking Up the Player


Follow Steps 1 to 4 to hook up and adjust the settings of the player. Before you start, turn off the power, check that you have all of the supplied accessories, and insert the batteries into the remote (page 15). Notes
Plug cords securely to prevent unwanted noise. Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected.

A If you are connecting to a video input jack


Connect the yellow plug of the audio/video cord (supplied) to the yellow (video) jacks. You will enjoy standard quality images.
Yellow (Video) White (L) Red (R) Yellow (Video) White (L) Red (R)

Hookups

Use the red and white plugs to connect to the audio input jacks (page 21).

B If you are connecting to an S VIDEO input jack

Step 1: Connecting the Video Cords


Connect this player to your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) using a video cord. Select one of the patterns A through C, according to the input jack on your TV monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver). In order to view progressive signal (480p) pictures with a compatible TV, projector, or monitor, you must use connection C.

Connect the S VIDEO cord (not supplied). You will enjoy standard quality images.

C If you are connecting to a monitor, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) having


component video input jacks (Y, PB, PR)
Connect the component via the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks using the component video cord (supplied) or three video cords (not supplied) of the same kind and length. You will enjoy accurate color reproduction and high quality images. If your TV accepts progressive (480p) format signals, you must use this connection and set COMPONENT OUT to PROGRESSIVE in SCREEN SETUP (page 69).
Green Blue Red Green Blue Red

A
INPUT VIDEO

(yellow)

Audio/video cord (supplied)

Component video cord (supplied)

COMPONENT VIDEO IN
Y PB

C
(green) (blue) (red)

L AUDIO R

PR

TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver)

TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver) (yellow) (green) (blue) (red) CD/DVD player

Notes
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 1 2 R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2 PR Y
PROGRESSIVE INTERLACE SELECTABLE

COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

PB

Do not connect the player to a VCR if you pass the player signals via the VCR. You may not receive a clear image on the TV screen.
VCR

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT OUT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

CD/DVD player Connect directly


INPUT S VIDEO

TV

Consumers should note that not all high definition television sets are fully compatible with this product and may cause artifacts to be displayed in the picture. In the case of 480 progressive scan picture problems, it is recommended that the user switch the connection to the standard definition output. If there are questions regarding your Sony TV sets compatibility with this model 480p DVD player, please contact our customer service center.
S VIDEO cord (not supplied)

B
18

TV, projector, or AV amplifier (receiver)

l : Signal flow

19

Step 2: Connecting the Audio Cords


Refer to the chart below to select the connection that best suits your system. The surround effects you will enjoy depend on the connections and components you use.

Connecting to your TV

This connection will use your TV speakers for sound. x Recommended surround sound effects for this connection TVS DYNAMIC (page 51) TVS WIDE (page 51)
CD/DVD player
A

Hookups

Select a connection
Select one of the following connections,
Connection

through

.
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 1 2 R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2 PR Y


PROGRESSIVE INTERLACE SELECTABLE

Components to be connected

PB

A B

(page 21) (page 22)

TV (stereo) Stereo amplifier (receiver) (having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack) 2 speakers (front L and R) MD deck/DAT deck AV amplifier (receiver) with a Dolby* Surround (Pro Logic) decoder (having L and R audio input jacks only, or having a digital input jack) 3 speakers (front L and R, and rear (monaural)) 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, and subwoofer) AV amplifier (receiver) having a Dolby Digital or DTS** decoder and a digital input jack 6 speakers (front L and R, rear L and R, center, and subwoofer)

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT OUT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

A
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1

B C

(page 22) (page 23)

(yellow) (white)

(yellow) TV (white) Audio/video cord (supplied) (red)

R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2

(red)

to audio input

LINE OUT

(page 24)

l : Signal flow

The yellow plug is used for video signals (page 18).

* Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works. 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved. ** DTS is a registered trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

continued

20

21

1-4

B Connecting to a stereo amplifier (receiver) and 2 speakers/Connecting to an MD deck or DAT deck

C Connecting to a Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) decoder amplifier (receiver) and 3 to 6 speakers

This connection will use your 2 front speakers connected to your stereo amplifier (receiver) for sound. If the stereo amplifier (receiver) has audio input jacks L and R only, use B-1 . If the amplifier (receiver) has a digital input jack, use B-2 . When connecting to an MD deck or a DAT deck, use B-2 . In this case, you can also connect the player directly to the MD deck or DAT deck without using your stereo amplifier (receiver). x Recommended surround sound effects for the TVS STANDARD (page 51)
B-1

connection only

z In connection B-1 , you can use the supplied audio/video cord instead of using a separate audio cord. z To realize better surround sound effects, make sure that your listening position is in between your speakers. Note
If you select one of the TVS effects while playing a disc, no sound will come from your speakers with the B-2 connection.
CD/DVD player
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 1 2 R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2 PR Y
PROGRESSIVE INTERLACE SELECTABLE

This connection will allow you to enjoy the surround effects of the Pro Logic decoder on your amplifier (receiver). If you have an AV amplifier (receiver) equipped with a Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder, refer to page 24. You can enjoy the Dolby Surround effects only when playing Dolby Surround audio or multichannel audio (Dolby Digital) discs. Pro Logic uses a minimum of 3 speakers (front L and R, and rear (monaural)). The surround effects are enhanced if 6 speakers (front L and R, center, rear L and R, and subwoofer) are used. If your amplifier (receiver) has R and L audio input jacks only, use C-1 . If your amplifier (receiver) has a digital input jack, use C-2 . x Recommended surround sound effects using this connection with your amplifier (receiver) Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 79) z For correct speaker setting location, please refer to the operating instructions of the amplifier (receiver).
CD/DVD player
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 1 2 R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2 PR Y
PROGRESSIVE INTERLACE SELECTABLE

Hookups

COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

PB

COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

PB

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT OUT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT OUT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

B-2

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied) (white)

B-1
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1

C-2
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied) (white)

C-1
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1

or

or

or
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

or

(red) Stereo audio cord (not supplied)

R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2

(red) Stereo audio cord (not supplied)

R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting

Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting (white) (red) to coaxial or optical digital input

(white)

(red) to audio input [Speakers]

to coaxial or optical digital input [Speakers]


Front (L)

to audio input

[Speakers] Dolby Surround amplifier (receiver)

Stereo amplifier (receiver)

Rear (L)

Rear (R)

Front (L)

Front (R)

Subwoofer Front (R)

center

Rear* (mono)

MD deck/DAT deck

l: Signal flow

l: Signal flow

When connecting 6 speakers, replace the monaural rear speaker with a center speaker, 2 rear speakers and a subwoofer.

continued

22

23

D Connecting to an AV amplifier (receiver) with a digital input jack having a Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder, and 6 speakers

Step 3: Connecting the Power Cord


Plug the player and TV power cords into an AC outlet. Do not connect the power cord of your player to the switched power socket of an amplifier (receiver). When you turn off the power of your amplifier (receiver), the menu setting for the player such as Playback Memory may be lost.

This connection will allow you to use the Dolby Digital, or DTS decoder function of your AV amplifier (receiver). You are not able to enjoy the TVS sound effects of the player. x Recommended surround sound effects using this connection with your amplifier (receiver) Dolby Digital (5.1ch) (page 79) DTS (5.1ch) (page 79) z To enhance the surround sound effects, refer to the operating instructions of the amplifier (receiver) for correct speaker setting location. Note
After you have completed the connection, be sure to set DOLBY DIGITAL to DOLBY DIGITAL(page 25). If your AV amplifier (receiver) has a DTS decoder, set DTS to ON (page 25). Otherwise, no sound or a loud noise will come from the speakers.
CD/DVD player
R AUDIO 1 L VIDEO 1 1 2 R AUDIO 2 L VIDEO 2 PR Y
PROGRESSIVE INTERLACE SELECTABLE

Hookups

Step 4: Quick Setup


Follow the steps below to make the minimum number of basic adjustments for using the player. To skip an adjustment, press >. To return to the previous adjustment, press ..
[/1 ENTER
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

PB

DIGITAL OUT

LINE OUT

S VIDEO COMPONENT OUT VIDEO OUT

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

./> ./> X/x

D
COAXIAL OPTICAL
PCM/DTS/ DOLBY DIGITAL

POWER or

X/x ENTER

1 Turn on the TV. 2 Switch the input selector on the TV to the player. 3 Press POWER on the player and press [/1 on the remote.
Press [ENTER] to run QUICK SETUP appears at the bottom of the screen. If this message does not appear, select QUICK under SETUP in the Control Menu to run Quick Setup (page 67).

DIGITAL OUT

Optical digital cord (not supplied) Remove jack cap before connecting
Rear (R)

Coaxial digital cord (not supplied)

4 Press ENTER without inserting a disc.


to coaxial digital input
Front (R)

The Setup Display for selecting the language used in the on-screen display appears.
LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE: ENGLISH ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE

to optical digital input

AV amplifier (receiver) with a decoder [Speakers] [Speakers]


Front (L)

Rear (L)

Subwoofer

Center

l: Signal flow

continued

24

25

1-5

5 Press X/x to select a language.


The player uses the language selected here to display the DVD menu and subtitles as well.

qa Press X/x to select the item, then press ENTER.

6 Press ENTER.
The Setup Display for selecting the aspect ratio of the TV to be connected appears.
SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: MODE: 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN 16:9 AUTO

When NO or LINE OUTPUT L/R (AUDIO) is selected, Quick Setup is finished and connections are complete. When DIGITAL OUTPUT is selected, the Setup Display for DOLBY DIGITAL appears. Proceed to Step qs. Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected in page 22 to 24 ( through D ).
AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: OFF AUDIO DRC: STANDARD DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND DIGITAL OUT: ON DOLBY DIGITAL: D-PCM DTS: D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL

qs Press X/x to select the item.


B

Hookups

7 Press X/x to select the item.


TV Type 4:3 standard TV A wide-screen TV or 4:3 standard TV with a wide-screen mode You select 4:3 LETTER BOX or 4:3 PAN SCAN 16:9 Page 69

Audio Cord Connection Type 69


B-2 D C-2

You select D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL (only if the amplifier/receiver has a Dolby Digital decoder)

Page 75 75

8 Press ENTER.
The Setup Display for selecting the type of video signal appears.
SCREEN SETUP 4:3 LETTER BOX TV TYPE: ON SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE MODE: INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE

qd Press ENTER.
DTS is selected.
AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: OFF AUDIO DRC: STANDARD DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND DIGITAL OUT: ON D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF OFF ON

9 Press X/x to select the item.

Select PROGRESSIVE only if you have made video connection C (page 18) and wish to view progressive video signals.
TV Type Interlace format TV (standard TV) Progressive format TV You select INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE Page 70 70

qf Press X/x to select the item.


Choose the item that matches the audio connection you selected in page 22 to 24 ( through D ).
Audio Cord Connection Type
B-2 D C-2 B

You select OFF ON (only if the amplifier/receiver has a DTS decoder)

Page 75 75

q; Press ENTER.
The Setup Display for selecting the type of jack used to connect your amplifier (receiver) appears.
Is this player connected to an amplifier (receiver) ? Select the type of jack you are using.
YES LINE OUTPUT L/R (AUDIO) DIGITAL OUTPUT NO

qg Press ENTER.
Quick Setup is finished. All connections and setup operations are complete. Note
You can directly start Quick Setup only when you run it for the first time. To run Quick Setup a second time, select QUICK under SETUP in the Control Menu (page 67).

26
Playing Discs

continued

27

Enjoying the surround sound effects


To enjoy the surround sound effects of this player or your amplifier (receiver), the following items must be set as described below for the audio connection you selected in page 20 to 24 ( B through D ). Each of these are the default settings and do not need to be adjusted when you first connect the player. Refer to page 67 for using the Setup Display. Audio Connection (page 20 to 24)
A

Playing Discs
Depending on the DVD or VIDEO CD, some operations may be different or restricted. Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your disc.

Press A on the player, and place a disc on the disc tray.


The player automatically turns on and the power indicator lights up in green.

Playing Discs

POWER Power indicator

No additional settings are needed.

x With the playback side facing down

B-1

C-1

5
You select DOLBY SURROUND Page 74
[/1
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

Press H.
The disc tray closes, and the player starts playback (continuous play). Adjust the volume on the TV or the amplifier (receiver).

Item DOWNMIX

If the sound distorts even when the volume is turned down, set AUDIO ATT to ON (page 74).

B-2

C-2

AUDIO

Item DOWNMIX DIGITAL OUT

You select DOLBY SURROUND ON

Page 74 75
H x

1 2

After following Step 5 Depending on the disc, a menu may appear on the TV screen. You can play the disc interactively by following the instructions on the menu. DVD (page 32), VIDEO CD (page 33). To turn on the player Press POWER on the player. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. Press [/1 on the remote. The player turns on and the power indicator lights up in green. In standby mode, the player also turns on by pressing A on the player or by pressing H. To turn off the player Press [/1 on the remote. The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red. To turn off the player completely, press POWER on the player. While playing a disc, do not turn off the player by pressing POWER. Doing so may cancel the menu settings. When you turn off the player, first press x to stop playback and then press [/1 on the remote.
continued

Turn on your TV. Switch the input selector on the TV to the player.
When using an amplifier (receiver) Turn on the amplifier (receiver) and select the appropriate channel.

Press POWER on the player.


The player enters standby mode and the power indicator lights up in red.

28

29

1-6

Notes on playing DTS sound tracks on a CD When playing DTS-encoded CDs, excessive noise will be heard from the analog stereo jacks. To avoid possible damage to the audio system, the consumer should take proper precautions when the analog stereo jacks of the player are connected to an amplification system. To enjoy DTS Digital Surround playback, an external 5.1-channel decoder system must be connected to the digital jacks of the player. Set the sound to STEREO using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD (page 49). Do not play DTS sound tracks without first connecting the player to an audio component having a built-in DTS decoder. The player outputs the DTS signal via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jacks even if DTS in AUDIO SETUP is set to OFF in the Setup Display (page 75), and may affect your ears or cause your speakers to be damaged. Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jacks. If you connect the player to audio equipment without a DTS decoder, do not set DTS to ON in AUDIO SETUP (page 75). A loud noise may come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged. When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks, set DTS to ON in AUDIO SETUP (page 75).

Additional operations
Z
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

Resuming Playback from the Point Where You Stopped the Disc (Resume Play)
When you stop the disc, the player remembers the point where you pressed x and RESUME appears on the front panel display. As long as you do not open the disc tray, Resume Play works even if the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1.
H

Notes
Depending on where you stopped the disc, the player may not resume playback from exactly the same point. The point where you stopped playing is cleared when: you turn the power off by pressing POWER on the player. you change the play mode. you change the settings on the Setup Display.

./> H

INSTANT REPLAY X x

Playing Discs

To Stop Pause Resume play after pause Go to the next chapter, track or scene in continuous play mode Go back to the preceding chapter, track or scene in continuous play mode Stop play and remove the disc Replay a previous scene (DVD only)

Operation Press x Press X Press X or H Press >

Press .

1
Press Z Press INSTANT REPLAY

While playing a disc, press x to stop playback.


RESUME appears on the front panel display and you can restart the disc from the point where you stopped the disc. If RESUME does not appear, Resume Play is not available.

z The Instant Replay function is useful when you


want to review a scene or dialog that you missed.

Note
You may not be able to use the Instant Replay function with some scenes.

Press H.
The player starts playback from the point where you stopped the disc in Step 1.

z To play from the beginning of the disc, press x


twice, then press H.

30

31

Using the DVDs Menu


Some discs have a title menu or a DVD menu. On some DVDs, this may simply be called a menu or title.

Using the DVD menu


Some DVDs allow you to select the disc contents using a menu. When you play these DVDs, you can select items such as the language for the subtitles and the language for the sound using the DVD menu.

Playing VIDEO CDs with PBC Functions (PBC Playback)


With PBC (Playback Control) functions, you can enjoy simple interactive operations, search functions, and other such operations. PBC playback allows you to play VIDEO CDs interactively by following the menu on the TV screen.

z To play without using PBC, press ./> or the number buttons while the player is stopped to select a track, then press H or ENTER. Play without PBC appears on the TV screen and the player starts continuous play. You cannot play still pictures such as a menu. To return to PBC playback, press x twice then press H. Note
Depending on the VIDEO CD, Press ENTER in Step 3 may appear as Press SELECT in the instructions supplied with the disc. In this case, press H.

Using the title menu


A DVD is divided into long sections of a picture or a music feature called titles. When you play a DVD which contains several titles, you can select the title you want using the title menu.
1 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

Playing Discs

Number buttons

4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

DVD MENU C/X/x/c ENTER

Number buttons

4 7

Number buttons

4 7

. />

1
TITLE C/X/x/c ENTER

Press DVD MENU. The DVD menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc. Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the item you want to change. To change other items, repeat Step 2. Press ENTER.

x X/x ENTER ORETURN

2 3 4

1 2 3 4

Press TITLE. The title menu appears on the TV screen. The contents of the menu vary from disc to disc. Press C/X/x/c or the number buttons to select the title you want to play. Press ENTER. The player starts playing the selected title.

Start playing a VIDEO CD with PBC functions.


The menu for your selection appears.

2 3

z You can also display the DVD menu by pressing


DVD MENU on the player.

Select the item number you want by pressing X/x or the number buttons. Press ENTER. Follow the instructions in the menu for interactive operations.
Refer to the instructions supplied with the disc, as the operating procedure may differ according to the VIDEO CD.

z You can also display the title menu by pressing


TITLE on the player.

To go back to the menu Press O RETURN.

32

33

1-7

Various Play Mode Functions (Program Play, Shuffle


Play, Repeat Play, A-B Repeat Play)

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice (when playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select (PROGRAM), then press ENTER. The options for PROGRAM appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF OFF SET ON PLAY DVD

Select the title, chapter, or track you want to program. x When playing a DVD For example, select chapter 03 of title 02. Press X/x or the number buttons to select 02 under T, then press ENTER.
PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE 2. TITLE 3. TITLE 4. TITLE 5. TITLE 6. TITLE 7. TITLE T 01 02 03 04 05 C ALL 01 02 03 04 05 06

Press H to start Program Play. Program Play begins. When the program ends, you can restart the same program again by pressing H.

You can set the following play modes: Program Play (page 34) Shuffle Play (page 36) Repeat Play (page 36) A- B Repeat Play (page 37) Notes
The play mode is canceled when: you open the disc tray. the player enters standby mode by pressing [/1 on the remote. you turn the power off by pressing POWER on the player. If you are playing a VIDEO CD with PBC, you must first cancel PBC playback before you can set a play mode (except when you want to set A-B Repeat Play for moving pictures).

To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select OFF in Step 3. To play the same program again, select ON in Step 3 and press H. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. To change the program

Playing Discs

Press X/x to select SET t, then press ENTER. The display for programming appears.
TRACK is displayed when you play a VIDEO CD or a CD.
PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE 2. TITLE 3. TITLE 4. TITLE 5. TITLE 6. TITLE 7. TITLE T 01 02 03 04 05

Next, press X/x or the number buttons to select 03 under C, then press ENTER.
Selected title and chapter
PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE 0 2 0 3 2. TITLE 3. TITLE 4. TITLE 5. TITLE 6. TITLE 7. TITLE

1 2

T 01 02 03 04 05

In Step 4, select the program number of the title, chapter, or track you want to change using X/x or the number buttons, and press c. Follow Step 5 for new programming.

Creating your own program (Program Play)


You can play the contents of a disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the titles, chapters, or tracks on the disc to create your own program. You can program up to 99 titles, chapters, and tracks.

Titles or tracks recorded on a disc

x When playing a VIDEO CD or CD For example, select track 02. Press X/x or the number buttons to select 02 under T, then press ENTER.
Selected track

Press c. The cursor moves to the title or track (in this case, 01).
PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TITLE 2. TITLE 3. TITLE 4. TITLE 5. TITLE 6. TITLE 7. TITLE T 01 02 03 04 05 C ALL 01 02 03 04 05 06

PROGRAM ALL CLEAR 1. TRACK 0 2 2. TRACK 3. TRACK 4. TRACK 5. TRACK 6. TRACK 7. TRACK

0:15:30 T 01 02 03 04 05

To cancel the programmed order To cancel all the titles, chapters, or tracks in the programmed order, press X, and select ALL CLEAR in Step 4. To cancel the selected program, select the program using X/x in Step 4, then press CLEAR, or select -- in Step 5, then press ENTER. To cancel the program directly, select the program using the number buttons, followed by ENTER. z You can do Repeat Play or Shuffle Play of the
programmed titles, chapters, or tracks. Press REPEAT or SHUFFLE on the remote, or set REPEAT or SHUFFLE to ON in the Control Menu display during Program Play.

Number buttons CLEAR PROGRAM SHUFFLE H

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

REPEAT

Total time of the programmed tracks

z You can select PROGRAM directly by pressing PROGRAM. Note


The number of titles, chapters, or tracks displayed is the same as the number of titles, chapters, or tracks recorded on a disc.

X/x/c ENTER DISPLAY Chapters recorded on a disc

To program other titles, chapters, or tracks, repeat Steps 4 to 5. The programmed titles, chapters, and tracks are displayed in the selected order.

continued

34

35

Playing in random order (Shuffle Play)


You can have the player shuffle titles, chapters, or tracks and play them in a random order. Subsequent shuffling may produce a different playing order.
7 8 0 9

x When playing a VIDEO CD, CD, or DVD (Program Play is set to ON) ON: shuffles titles or tracks selected in Program Play and plays them in a random order.

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. Select (REPEAT) using X/x, then press ENTER. The options for REPEAT appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF OFF DISC TITLE CHAPTER PLAY DVD

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set Repeat Play while the player is stopped. After selecting the REPEAT option, press H. Repeat Play starts. z You can select REPEAT directly by pressing REPEAT.

Press ENTER. Shuffle Play starts.

CLEAR SHUFFLE

Playing Discs

To return to normal play Press CLEAR or select OFF in Step 3.


X/x ENTER

Repeating a specific portion (A-B Repeat Play)


You can play a specific portion of a title, chapter, or track repeatedly. (This function is useful when you want to memorize lyrics, etc.)
4 7 5 8 0 6 9

DISPLAY

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set Shuffle Play while the player is
stopped. After selecting the SHUFFLE option, press H. Shuffle Play starts.

Press X/x to select the item. x When playing a DVD (Program Play and Shuffle Play are set to OFF) DISC: repeats all of the titles. TITLE: repeats the current title on a disc. CHAPTER: repeats the current chapter. x When playing a VIDEO CD or CD (Program Play and Shuffle Play are set to OFF) DISC: repeats all of the tracks on a disc. TRACK: repeats the current track. x When Program Play or Shuffle Play is on ON: repeats Program Play or Shuffle Play.

CLEAR

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing a CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select (SHUFFLE), then press ENTER. The options for SHUFFLE appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF OFF TITLE CHAPTER PLAY DVD

z You can select SHUFFLE directly by pressing


SHUFFLE.

Note
Up to 200 chapters in a disc can be played in random order when CHAPTER is selected.

X/x ENTER DISPLAY

Playing repeatedly (Repeat Play)


You can play all of the titles or tracks on a disc, or a single title, chapter, or track repeatedly. You can use a combination of Shuffle or Program Play modes.
4 7 5 8 0 6 9

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback (when playing CD, press once). The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select (A-B REPEAT), then press ENTER. The options for A-B REPEAT appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 PLAY DVD

Press X/x to select the item. x When playing a DVD (Program Play is set to OFF) TITLE: shuffles titles and plays them in a random order. CHAPTER: shuffles chapters and plays them in a random order. x When playing a VIDEO CD or CD (Program Play is set to OFF) TRACK: shuffles tracks and plays them in a random order.

CLEAR

REPEAT

4
H X/x ENTER DISPLAY

Press ENTER. Repeat Play starts.

To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select OFF in Step 3.

OFF SET OFF

continued

36

37

1-8

Searching for a Scene

A-B REPEAT Set point A with


ENTER .

You can quickly locate a particular point on a disc by monitoring the picture or playing back slowly.

During playback, when you find the starting point (point A) of the portion to be played repeatedly, press ENTER. The starting point (point A) is set.
c
A-B REPEAT Set point B with
ENTER

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

Playback direction 2B (DVD/CD only) t FF1M t FF2M

H
.

Note
CHAPTER TIME A: 18 1 : 32 : 55

Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD, you may not be able to do some of the operations described.

12(27) 18(34) T 1 : 34 : 30

PLAY DVD

ON CHAPTER TIME A: 18 1 : 32 : 55 B: 18 1 : 34 : 30

The FF1M/FR1m playback speed is the same as the scan speed and click shuttle speed described below.

Playback direction SLOW 2y y SLOW 1y

The SLOW2y/SLOW2 playback speed is slower than SLOW1y/SLOW1 .

continued

38

Playing one frame at a time


You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. When the player is in the pause mode, press C to go to the next frame. Press c to go to the preceding frame (DVD only). If you hold the button down, you can view the frames in succession. To return to normal playback, press H.

During pause mode (DVD only)

Using the click shuttle on the player (Shuttle mode)

SLOW1y Slow (playback direction) Y SLOW2y Slow (playback direction slower than SLOW1y) Y PAUSEX Pause Y SLOW2 Slow (opposite direction slower than SLOW1 ) Y SLOW1 Slow (opposite direction)
During pause mode (VIDEO CD only)

To manually play the disc frame by frame using the click shuttle (Jog mode)

Searching for a Title/ Chapter/Track/Index/ Scene (Search mode)


You can search a DVD disc by title or chapter, and you can search a VIDEO CD or CD by track, index, or scene. As titles and tracks are assigned unique numbers on the disc, you can select the desired one by entering its number. Or, you can search for a scene using the time code (Time search).
Number buttons CLEAR
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

1 2

Press JOG. The player enters pause mode. Turn the click shuttle. Depending on the turning speed, playback goes to frame-by-frame playback in the direction that the click shuttle is turned (turn clockwise to go forward, counter clockwise to rewind). If you turn the click shuttle at a constant speed for a while, the playback speed goes to slow or normal.

JOG

SLOW1y Slow (playback direction) Y SLOW2y Slow (playback direction slower than SLOW1y) Y PAUSEX Pause To return to continuous play Press H.

To return to Continuous Play Press H. To turn off the Jog mode Press JOG again so that the indicator turns off.
X/x ENTER DISPLAY

Click shuttle

Turn the click shuttle on the player. The playback speed changes depending on the turning direction and degree of rotation as follows:
During playback

FF2M Fast forward (faster than FF1M) Y FF1M Fast forward Y 2B (DVD/CD only) Y PLAYN (normal speed) Y 2b (DVD/CD only) Y FR1m Fast rewind Y FR2m Fast rewind (faster than FF1m) If you turn the click shuttle quickly, the playback speed goes to FF2M or FR2m at once.

1 2

Press DISPLAY.
The Control Menu appears.

Press X/x to select the search method.


x When playing a DVD (TITLE), (CHAPTER), or (TIME/ TEXT) Select TIME/TEXT for Time search (see below). x When playing a VIDEO CD (TRACK) or (INDEX)
continued

40

1-9

To return to normal play Press CLEAR, or select OFF in Step 3.

Opposite direction (DVD only) SLOW 2 y SLOW 1

When you reach the ending point (point B), press ENTER again. The set points are displayed and the player starts repeating this specific portion. A-B appears in the front panel display during A-B Repeat Play.

Locating a point quickly (Search)


During playback, keep pressing C to locate a point in playback direction at the FF1M* speed or keep pressing c to locate a point in opposite direction at the FR1m* speed. When you find the point you want, release the button to return to normal playback speed.

Opposite direction 2b (DVD only) t FR1m t FR2m


/ y

The 2B/2b playback speed is about twice the normal speed. The FF2M/FR2m playback speed is faster than FF1M/FR1m.

Watching frame by frame (Slowmotion play)


You can use this function only for DVDs or VIDEO CDs. Press or y when the player is in the pause mode. To return to the normal speed, press H. Each time you press the or y button during Slow-motion play, the playback speed changes. Two speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows:

You can set A-B Repeat Play for only one specific section. When you set A-B Repeat Play, the settings for Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, and Program Play are canceled.

Press or y while playing a disc. When you find the point you want, press H to return to normal speed. Each time you press or y during scan the playback speed changes. Three speeds are available. With each press the indication changes as follows:

Press X/x to select SET t, then press ENTER. The A-B REPEAT setting display appears.

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Notes

Searching for a Particular Point on a Disc (Search, Scan,


Slow-Motion Play, Freeze Frame)

Locating a point quickly by playing a disc in fast forward or fast reverse (Scan)

Searching for a Scene

39

y y

Searching for a Scene

41

x When playing a VIDEO CD with PBC Playback (SCENE) x When playing a CD (TRACK) or (INDEX) Example: when you select (CHAPTER) **(**) is selected (** refers to a number). The number in parentheses indicates the total number of titles, chapters, tracks, indexes, or scenes.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 PLAY DVD

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. To search for a scene using the time code (Time search) (DVD only)

Searching by Scene (VIEWER)


You can divide the screen into 9 sub-screens and find the desired scene quickly.
X C/X/x/c ENTER DISPLAY O RETURN

Press ENTER.

To return to the normal play Press O RETURN. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. Notes

In Step 2, select (TIME/ TEXT). T **:**:** (playing time of the current title) is selected. Press ENTER. T **:**:** changes to T --:--:--. Input the time code using the number buttons, then press ENTER. For example, to find the scene at 2 hours, 10 minutes, and 20 seconds after the beginning, just enter 2:10:20.

2 3

Searching for a Scene

Depending on the disc, you may not be able to select all functions. The sound is muted when using this function.

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback.


The Control Menu appears.

Dividing a track into 9 sections (STROBE PLAYBACK)


You can display 9 consecutive moving pictures on the screen. When you press X, the moving pictures pause. Select STROBE PLAYBACK in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4.

Selected row

Press ENTER.
** (**) changes to -- (**).
12(27) (34) T 1:32:55

z You can display the first scene of titles, chapters or tracks recorded on the disc on a screen divided into 9 scenes. You can start playback directly by selecting one of the scenes. For details, see page 43.
PLAY DVD

Press X/x to select (VIEWER), then press ENTER.


The options for VIEWER appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 PLAY DVD

Note
The title, chapter, or track number displayed is the same number recorded on the disc.

Scanning the title, chapter, or track

STROBE PLAYBACK TITLE VIEWER CHAPTER VIEWER ANGLE VIEWER STROBE PLAYBACK

3
Select the number of the title, track, scene, time code, etc. you want by pressing X/x or the number buttons to select the digit.
If you make a mistake Cancel the number by pressing CLEAR, then select another number.

Press X/x to select the item.


Refer to the explanations given for each item in the following sections. STROBE PLAYBACK TITLE VIEWER (for DVD only) CHAPTER VIEWER (for DVD only) TRACK VIEWER (for VIDEO CD only) ANGLE VIEWER (for DVD only)

You can divide the screen into 9 subscreens and display the first scene of titles, chapters, or tracks. You can also play back from the selected title, chapter, or track. Select the item you want in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4.
x When playing a DVD

Select TITLE VIEWER or CHAPTER VIEWER.


x When playing a VIDEO CD

Select TRACK VIEWER.


The initial scenes of titles, chapters, or tracks appear.

Press ENTER.
The player starts playback from the selected number.

continued

42
Viewing Information About the Disc
To start playback from the selected scene Select the scene using C/X/x/c, then press ENTER. The playback starts from the selected scene. z If there are more than 9 titles, chapters, or tracks,
V is displayed at the bottom right. To display the additional titles, chapters, or tracks, select the bottom right scene (the position 9) and press x. To return to the previous scene, select the top left scene (the position 1), then press X.

43

When playing a DVD

Viewing the Playing Time and Remaining Time on the Front Panel Display
You can check information about the disc, such as the remaining time, total number of titles of a DVD, or tracks of a CD or VIDEO CD, using the front panel display (page 9).
TIME/TEXT

Title playing time and the current title and chapter number
TITLE CHAP HOUR MIN SEC

Remaining time of the current title


TITLE CHAP HOUR MIN SEC

Playing time and number of the current chapter


CHAP HOUR MIN SEC

Viewing Information About the Disc

Remaining time of the current chapter


4 5 6
CHAP HOUR MIN SEC

Text

Displaying different angles simultaneously


If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD, you can display all of the angles recorded on the disc on the same screen, and start playback in continuous mode at the chosen angle. The angles are displayed on a screen divided in 9 sections. Select ANGLE VIEWER in Step 3, then press ENTER in Step 4.

Press TIME/TEXT.
Each time you press TIME/TEXT while playing the disc, the display changes as shown in the following charts.

When playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD


Track playing time and the current track and index number
TRACK INDEX MIN SEC

Remaining time of the current track


TRACK INDEX MIN SEC

Playing time of the disc

To return to the normal play Press O RETURN.


Remaining time of the disc

MIN

SEC

MIN

SEC

Text

z When playing VIDEO CDs with PBC functions, the scene number and the playing time are displayed.
continued

44

45

1-10

z The playing time and remaining time of the current chapter, title, track, scene, or disc will also appear on your TV screen. See the following section Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time for instructions on how to read this information. Note
Depending on the type of disc being played and the playing mode, the above mentioned disc information may not be displayed.

Checking the Playing Time and Remaining Time


You can check the playing time and remaining time of the current title, chapter, or track, and the total playing time or remaining time of the disc. Also, you can check the DVD/CD text recorded on the disc.
0

xWhen playing a DVD T **:**:** Playing time of the current title T**:**:** Remaining time of the current title C **:**:** Playing time of the current chapter C**:**:** Remaining time of the current chapter xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (with PBC functions) **:** Playing time of the current scene xWhen playing a VIDEO CD (without PBC functions) or CD T **:** Playing time of the current track T**:** Remaining time of the current track D **:** Playing time of the current disc D**:** Remaining time of the current disc

Checking the DVD/CD text Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly in Step 3 to display the text recorded on the DVD/CD. The DVD/CD text appears only when text is recorded in the disc. You cannot change the text. If the disc does not contain text, NO TEXT appears.

TIME/TEXT BRAHMS SYMPHONY NO 4

DVD/CD text

TIME/TEXT

z If the DVD/CD text does not fit on a single line,


you can see the entire text by watching it scroll across the front display.

Viewing Information About the Disc

DISPLAY

z You can select the time and text by pressing TIME/TEXT. Notes
Only letters of the alphabet can be displayed. This player can only display the first level of DVD/ CD text, such as the disc name or title.

Press DISPLAY during playback.


The Control Menu appears.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 PLAY DVD

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

Disc type Playing time of title or track

Press TIME/TEXT repeatedly to change the time information.


The display and the kinds of time that you can change depend on the disc you are playing.

46
Sound Adjustments

47

Checking the Play Information (ADVANCED)


You can check information such as the bit rate or the disc layer that is being played. While playing a disc, an approximate bit rate of the playback picture is always displayed as Mbps (Mega bit per second) and the audio as kbps (kilo bit per second).
X/x ENTER DISPLAY

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

Changing the Sound


If the DVD is recorded with multilingual tracks, you can select the language you want while playing the DVD. If the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats (PCM, Dolby Digital, or DTS), you can select the audio format you want while playing the DVD. With stereo CDs or VIDEO CDs, you can select the sound from the right or left channel and listen to the sound of the selected channel through both the right and left speakers. (In this case, the sound loses its stereo effect.) For example, when playing a disc containing a song with the vocals on the right channel and the instruments on the left channel, you can select the left channel and hear the instruments from both speakers.

Displays of each item


By pressing DISPLAY repeatedly, you can display either BIT RATE or LAYER, whichever was selected in ADVANCED.
BIT RATE

12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH 1: ENGLISH 2: ENGLISH 3: FRENCH

PLAY DVD PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 L LS C LFE RS R

Press X/x to select the desired audio signal.


xWhen playing a DVD Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they represent the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 82 to see which language the code represents. When the same language is displayed two or more times, the DVD is recorded in multiple audio formats. xWhen playing a VIDEO CD or CD The default setting is underlined. STEREO: The standard stereo sound 1/L: The sound of the left channel (monaural) 2/R: The sound of the right channel (monaural)

BIT RATE
384kbps 0 5 10 Mbps

Audio Video

1 2

Press DISPLAY during playback.


The Control Menu is displayed.

Bit rate refers to the amount of video/audio data per second in a disc. The higher the bit rate, the larger the amount of data. When the bit rate level is high, there is a large amount of data. However, this does not always mean that you can get higher quality pictures or sounds.
LAYER
Appears when the DVD has dual layers

Sound Adjustments

Press X/x to select (ADVANCED), then press ENTER.


The options for ADVANCED appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 PLAY DVD

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

AUDIO

BIT RATE OFF BIT RATE LAYER

BIT RATE
384 kbps 0 5 10 Mbps

Press X/x to select items.


For each item, please refer to Displays of each item. BIT RATE: displays the bit rate. LAYER: displays the layer and the pick-up point.

Indicates the approximate point where the disc is playing. If it is a dual-layer DVD, the player indicates which layer is being read (Layer 0 or Layer 1). For details on the layers, see page 79 (DVD).

X/x ENTER DISPLAY

Press ENTER.

1 2

Press DISPLAY during playback.


The Control Menu is displayed.

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can select AUDIO directly by pressing AUDIO. Each time you press the button, the item changes. Notes
For discs not in multiple audio format, you cannot change the sound. While playing the DVD, the sound may change automatically.

Press X/x to select (AUDIO), then ENTER.


The options for AUDIO appear.

Press ENTER.

To close the ADVANCED window Select OFF in Step 3.

continued

48

49

1-11

Displaying the audio information of the disc


When you select AUDIO, the channels being played are displayed on the screen. For example, in Dolby Digital format, multiple signals ranging from monaural to 5.1 channel signals can be recorded on a DVD. Depending on the DVD, the number of the recorded channels may differ.
Current audio format*
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 1: ENGLISH PLAY DVD PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 L LS C LFE RS R

The display examples are as follows: PCM (stereo)


PROGRAM FORMAT PCM 48kHz 24bit

TV Virtual Surround Sound Settings (TVS)


When you connect a stereo TV or 2 front speakers, TV Virtual Surround lets you enjoy surround sound effects by using sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L: left, R: right) without using actual rear speakers. This function is designed to work with the LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks. Note that if you select one of the TVS settings while playing a DVD, the player does not output Dolby Digital signals from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL and OPTICAL) jacks (when you set DOLBY DIGITAL in AUDIO SETUP to D-PCM) (page 75).
SURROUND

Press X/x to select one of the TVS (TV Virtual Surround) sounds.
Refer to the following explanations given for each item. TVS DYNAMIC TVS WIDE TVS NIGHT TVS STANDARD

Dolby Surround
PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 2/0 DOLBY SURROUND L C R S

Press ENTER.

To reset the TVS setting Select OFF in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.
TVS (TV Virtual Surround) DYNAMIC

Currently playing program format**

Dolby Digital 5.1ch LFE is always enclosed in a solid line regardless of the LFE signal component being output.
PROGRAM FORMAT DOLBY DIGITAL 3/2.1 L LS C LFE RS R

Sound Adjustments

* PCM, DTS, or DOLBY DIGITAL is displayed. In the case of DOLBY DIGITAL, the channels in the playing track are displayed by numbers as follows: For Dolby Digital 5.1 ch:
Rear component 2

X/x ENTER DISPLAY

DTS LFE is always enclosed in a solid line regardless of the LFE signal component being output.
PROGRAM FORMAT DTS 3/2.1 L LS C LFE RS R

Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L/R) without using actual rear speakers (shown below). The sound imaging effect is distinct and clearly reproduces each aural element of the audio track. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.
TV

DOLBY DIGITAL 3 / 2 . 1
Front component 2 + Center component 1 LFE (Low Frequency Effect) component 1

1 2

Press DISPLAY during playback.


The Control Menu appears.

**The letters in the program format display mean the following sound component: L: Front (left) R : Front (right) C : Center LS : Rear (left) RS : Rear (right) S : Rear (monaural): The rear component of the Dolby Surround processed signal or the Dolby Digital signal. LFE :Low Frequency Effect signal

Press X/x to select (TVS), then press ENTER.


The options for TVS appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 PLAY DVD

Notes
When the signal contains rear signal components such as LS, RS or S, the surround effect is enhanced (page 51). If DTS is set to OFF in AUDIO SETUP (page 75), the DTS track selection option will not appear on the screen even if the disc contains DTS tracks.

OFF OFF TVS DYNAMIC TVS WIDE VIRTUAL 3D SURROUND

continued

50
Enjoying Movies
TVS (TV Virtual Surround) WIDE

51

z You can select TVS directly by pressing


SURROUND on the remote or player. Each time you press the button, the item changes. If you select any TVS setting other than OFF, the indicator on the player lights up.

Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L/R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. This gives the sound an expanded effect that fills the area surrounding the listener. This mode is effective when the distance between the front L and R speakers is short, such as with built-in speakers on a stereo TV.
TV

Changing the Angles


If various angles (multi-angles) for a scene are recorded on the DVD, ANGLE appears in the front panel display. This means that you can change the viewing angle. For example, while playing a scene of a train in motion, you can display the view from either the front of the train, the left window of the train, or from the right window without having the trains movement interrupted.

Press c or ENTER.
The number of the angle changes to -.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55

PLAY DVD

Notes
When you select an effect, the sound cuts off for a moment. When the playing signal does not contain a signal for the rear speakers (page 50), the surround effects may be difficult to hear. When you select one of the TVS modes, turn off the surround setting of the connected TV or amplifier (receiver). Make sure that your listening position is between and at an equal distance from your speakers, and that the speakers are located in similar surroundings. Otherwise, the TVS effect may be hard to discern. TVS NIGHT only works with Dolby Digital discs. However, not all discs will respond to the TVS NIGHT function in the same way. If you use the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks, the sound output from your speakers will not have the TVS effect.

(9)

Select the angle number using the number buttons or X/x, then press ENTER.
The angle changes to the selected angle.

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

Number Buttons

4 7

ANGLE

TVS (TV Virtual Surround) NIGHT

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can select the angle directly by pressing ANGLE. Each time you press the button, the angle changes. z You can display all the angles recorded on the disc on the same screen, and start playback directly in continuous mode from the chosen angle. The angles are displayed on a screen divided in 9 sections. For details, see page 43. Note
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the angles even if multi-angles are recorded on the DVD.

Enjoying Movies

Large sounds, such as explosions, are suppressed, but the quieter sounds are unaffected. This feature is useful when you dont want to disturb other people but still want to hear the dialog and enjoy the surround sound effects of TVS WIDE.
TVS (TV Virtual Surround) STANDARD

X/x/c ENTER DISPLAY

1 2

Press DISPLAY during playback.


The Control Menu appears.

Uses sound imaging to create virtual rear speakers from the sound of the front speakers (L/R) without using actual rear speakers. The virtual speakers are reproduced as shown in the illustration below. Use this setting when you want to use TVS with 2 separate speakers and retain the sound quality.
L R

Press X/x to select (ANGLE).


The number of the angle appears. The number in parentheses indicates the total number of angles.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 1(9) PLAY DVD

L : Front speaker (left) R : Front speaker (right) : Virtual speaker

52

53

1-12

Displaying the Subtitles


If subtitles are recorded on the discs, you can turn the subtitles on and off whenever you want while playing. If multilingual subtitles are recorded on the disc, you can change the subtitle language while playing, and turn it on or off whenever you want. For example, you can select the language you want to practice and turn the subtitles on for better understanding.

Press X/x to select the language.


Depending on the DVD, the choice of language varies. When 4 digits are displayed, they indicate the language code. Refer to the language code list on page 82 to see which language the code represents.

Adjusting the Picture Quality (BNR)


The Block Noise Reduction (BNR) function adjusts the picture quality by reducing the block noise or mosaic like patterns that appear on your TV screen.

Press X/x to select a level.


As the value increases, the mosaic like patterns on your TV screen will decrease. 1: reduces the block noise. 2: reduces the block noise more than 1. 3: reduces the block noise more than 2.

Press ENTER.
1 4 7 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

To cancel the SUBTITLE setting Select OFF in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off.

BNR

Press ENTER.
The disc plays with the setting you selected.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

To cancel the BNR setting Select OFF in Step 3.


X/x ENTER DISPLAY

SUBTITLE

z You can select SUBTITLE directly by pressing


SUBTITLE. Each time you press the button, the item changes.

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set BNR while the player is stopped. z You can select BNR directly by pressing BNR on the remote or player. Each time you press the button, the item changes. If you select any setting other than OFF, the indicator on the player lights up. Notes
If the outlines of the images on your screen should become blurred, set BNR to OFF. Depending on the disc or the scene being played, the BNR effect may be hard to discern.

Enjoying Movies

X/x ENTER DISPLAY

Note
Depending on the DVD, you may not be able to change the subtitles even if multilingual subtitles are recorded on the DVD.

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback.


The Control Menu appears.

1 2

Press DISPLAY during playback.


The Control Menu appears.

Press X/x to select (BNR), then press ENTER.


The options for BNR appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF 1 2 3 OFF PLAY DVD

Press X/x to select (SUBTITLE), then press ENTER.


The options for SUBTITLE appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF OFF 1: ENGLISH 2: FRENCH 3: SPANISH PLAY DVD

54

55

Adjusting the Playback Picture (VIDEO EQUALIZER)


You can adjust the video signal of the DVD or VIDEO CD from the player, not from the TV, to obtain the picture quality you want. Choose the video mode that suits the program you are watching. When you select MEMORY t, you can make further adjustments to each element of the picture (color, brightness, etc.).
X/x ENTER DISPLAY

intensity. DYNAMIC 2: produces a more dynamic picture than DYNAMIC 1 by further increasing the picture contrast and the color intensity. CINEMA 1: enhances details in dark areas by increasing the black level. CINEMA 2: White colors become brighter and black colors become richer, and the color contrast is increased. MEMORY t: adjusts the picture in greater detail.

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback. The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select (VIDEO EQUALIZER), then press ENTER.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 STANDARD DYNAMIC 1 DYNAMIC 2 CINEMA 1 STANDARD PLAY DVD

Note
Only one set of MEMORY t adjustments can be stored. When you adjust the items again, the new setting erases the previous setting.

press ENTER

To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z When you watch a movie CINEMA 1 or CINEMA 2 is recommended.

Press X/x to select MEMORY t, and press ENTER. The video display appears. ( equalizer )
C 01:32:55 VIDEO EQUALIZER PICTURE BRIGHTNESS COLOR HUE RESET

Enjoying Movies

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback.


The Control Menu appears.

z You can set VIDEO EQUALIZER while the


player is stopped.

Press X/x to select (VIDEO EQUALIZER), then press ENTER.


The options for VIDEO EQUALIZER appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 STANDARD DYNAMIC 1 DYNAMIC 2 CINEMA 1 STANDARD PLAY DVD

Adjusting the picture items in MEMORY


You can adjust each element of the picture individually. PICTURE: changes the contrast BRIGHTNESS: changes the overall brightness COLOR: makes the colors deeper or lighter HUE: changes the color balance
X/x ENTER DISPLAY O RETURN

Select the picture item you want to adjust using X/x, then press ENTER. The adjustment bar of the selected item appears. Adjust the selected picture item using C/c, then press ENTER. The setting is stored in memory.
To cancel adjusting the picture

Press O RETURN before pressing ENTER to return to Step 2.

To adjust other items, repeat Steps 4 and 5.

VIDEO EQUALIZER S l

Press X/x to select the setting you want.


STANDARD: displays a standard picture. DYNAMIC 1: produces a bold dynamic picture by increasing the picture contrast and the color

To turn off the video equalizer memory display Press O RETURN. z To reset all of the picture items, select RESET in Step 4.

56

57

1-13

Using Various Additional Functions

Enhancing the Playback Picture (DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER)


The Digital Video Enhancer function makes the picture appear clear and crisp by enhancing the outlines of images on your TV screen. Also, this function can soften the images on the screen.
X/x ENTER DISPLAY

Press X/x to select a level.


As the value increases, the outlines of images on your TV screen will become crisper. 1: enhances the outline. 2: enhances the outline more than 1. 3: enhances the outline more than 2. SOFT: softens the image (DVD only).

Locking Discs (CUSTOM


PARENTAL CONTROL, PARENTAL CONTROL)
You can set two kinds of playback restrictions for the desired disc. Custom Parental Control You can set the playback restrictions so that the player will not play inappropriate discs. Parental Control Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users. The same password is used for both Parental Control and Custom Parental Control.

Press X/x to select (CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL), then press ENTER. CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL is selected.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 STOP DVD

Press ENTER.
The disc plays with the setting you selected.

OFF ON PASSWORD

To cancel the DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER setting Select OFF in Step 3. To turn off the Control Menu Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. z You can set DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER
while the player is stopped.

Press X/x to select ON t, then press ENTER. x If you have not entered a password The display for registering a new password appears.

Custom Parental Control


You can set the same Custom Parental Control password for up to 50 discs. When you set the fifty-first-disc, the first disc is canceled.

1 2

Press DISPLAY twice during playback.


The Control Menu appears.

Using Various Additional Functions

CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL


Enter a new 4-digit password, then press ENTER .

Press X/x to select (DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER), then press ENTER.


The options for DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER appear.
12(27) 18(34) T 1:32:55 OFF 1 2 3 SOFT OFF PLAY DVD

Note
Depending on the DVD/VIDEO CD disc or the scene being played, noise found in the disc may become more apparent. If this happens, reduce the Digital Video Enhancer level.
1 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

Number buttons

4 7

Enter a 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears. x When you have already registered a password The display for entering the password appears.
CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL

x C/X/x ENTER DISPLAY O RETURN

1 2
58

Insert the disc you want to lock. If the disc is playing, press x to stop playback. Press DISPLAY while the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears.

Enter password, then press

ENTER

continued

59

Enter or re-enter your 4-digit password by using the number buttons, then press ENTER. Custom parental control is set. appears and then the screen returns to the Control Menu.
If you make a mistake entering your password

Playing the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set


1 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL

Insert the disc for which Custom Parental Control is set. The CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL display appears.

Number buttons

4 7

Enter a new 4-digit password, then press ENTER .

H X/x
CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL
Custom parental control is already set. To play, enter your password and press ENTER .

Press C before you press ENTER and input the correct number.

ENTER DISPLAY O RETURN

Enter a 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for confirming the password appears. x When you have already registered a password The display for entering the password appears.
CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL
Enter password, then press
ENTER

If you make a mistake Press O RETURN, then repeat from Step 3 again. To turn off the Control Menu Press O RETURN, then press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Control Menu is turned off. To turn off the Custom Parental Control function

Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player is ready for playback.

Press DISPLAY while the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select then press ENTER. (SETUP),

2 3 4

z If you forget your password, enter the 6-digit


number 199703 using the number buttons when the CUSTOM PARENTAL CONTROL display asks you for your password, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4-digit password.

Press X/x select CUSTOM, then press ENTER. The Setup Display appears. Press X/x to select CUSTOM SETUP, then press ENTER. CUSTOM SETUP is displayed.
CUSTOM SETUP AUTO PLAY: DIMMER: PAUSE MODE: PARENTAL CONTROL PLAYBACK MEMORY: TRACK SELECTION: OFF BRIGHT AUTO ON OFF

Using Various Additional Functions

1 2

In Step 4, select OFF t, then press ENTER. Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

Limiting playback by children (Parental Control)


Playback of some DVDs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users. The Parental Control function allows you to set a playback limitation level. A scene that is limited is not played, or it is replaced by a different scene.

Enter or re-enter your password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display for setting the playback limitation level and changing the password appears.
CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD OFF USA

To change the password

1 2 3 4

In Step 4, press X/x to select PASSWORD t, then press ENTER. The display for entering the password appears. Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. Enter a new 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. To confirm your password, re-enter it using the number buttons, then press ENTER.

Press X/x to select PARENTAL CONTROL t, then press ENTER. x If you have not entered a password The display for registering a new password appears.

Press X/x to select STANDARD, then press ENTER. The selection items for STANDARD are displayed.

continued

60

61

1-14

CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD OFF USA USA OTHERS

To turn off the Setup Display Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off. To turn off the Parental Control function and play the DVD after entering your password Set LEVEL to OFF in Step 10. To change the password

Area Code Standard Argentina Australia Austria Belgium Brazil Canada Chile China Denmark Finland France Germany Hong Kong` India Standard Code number 2044 2047 2046 2057 2070 2079 2090 2092 2115 2165 2174 2109 2219 2248 2238 2254 2276 2304 Malaysia Mexico Netherlands Code number 2363 2362 2376

Operation Sound Effects


(Sound Feedback)
The player beeps when the following operations are performed. The default setting of the Sound Feedback function is set to off.
Operation Power is turned on Power is turned off H is pressed X is pressed Playback is stopped Operation is not possible Operation sound One beep Two beeps One beep Two beeps One long beep Three beeps

New Zealand 2390 Norway Pakistan Philippines Portugal Russia Singapore Spain Sweden Switzerland Taiwan Thailand United Kingdom 2379 2427 2424 2436 2489 2501 2149 2499 2086 2543 2528 2184

Press X/x to select a geographic area as the playback limitation level, then press ENTER. The area is selected. When you select OTHERS t, select and enter the standard code in the table on page 63 using the number buttons. Press ENTER. The selection items for LEVEL are displayed.
CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD OFF OFF 8: 7: 6: 5: NC17 R

In Step 7, select CHANGE PASSWORD t using x, then press ENTER. The display for entering the password appears. Follow Step 6 to enter a new password.

Playing a disc for which Parental Control is set

To set Sound Feedback

1 2

Insert the disc and press H. The PARENTAL CONTROL display appears. Enter your 4-digit password using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The player starts playback.

Indonesia Italy Japan Korea

Using Various Additional Functions

POWER Power indicator

10 Select the level you want using X/x,


then press ENTER. Parental Control setting is complete.
CUSTOM SETUP PARENTAL CONTROL LEVEL: STANDARD: CHANGE PASSWORD 4: PG13 USA

X [/1

z If you forget your password, remove the disc and


repeat Step 1 to 5 of Limiting playback by children. When you are asked to enter your password, enter 199703 using the number buttons, then press ENTER. The display will ask you to enter a new 4digit password. After you enter a new 4-digit password in Step 6, replace the disc in the player and press H. When the PARENTAL CONTROL display appears, enter your new password.

1 4 7

2 5 8 0

3 6 9

The lower the value, the more strict the limitation.

Notes
When you play DVDs which do not have the Parental Control function, playback cannot be limited on this player. Depending on the DVD, you may be asked to change the parental control level while playing the disc. In this case, enter your password, then change the level. If the Resume Play mode is canceled, the level returns to the original level.

Press POWER on the player, then press [/1 on the remote. The power indicator lights up in green. When there is a disc in the player, press A and remove the disc. Then press A again to close the disc tray. Press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds. You will hear one beep and the Sound Feedback function is turned on.
continued

If you make a mistake Press O RETURN to go back to the previous screen.

62

63

To turn off the Sound Feedback function When there is no disc in the player, press and hold X on the player for more than two seconds. You will hear two beeps and the Sound Feedback function is turned off.

Controlling Your TV or AV Amplifier (Receiver) with the Supplied Remote


By adjusting the remote signal, you can control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) with the supplied remote. The default signal (01) will control Sony TVs. If you connect the player to an AV amplifier (receiver), you can control the volume with the supplied remote. Notes
Depending on the units being connected, you may not be able to control your TV or AV amplifier (receiver) using some of the buttons below. If you enter a new code number, the code number previously entered will be erased. When you replace the batteries of the remote, the code number you have set may be reset to the default setting. Set the appropriate code number again.

Manufacture Sony (default) Akai AOC Centurion Coronado Curtis-Mathes Daytron Emerson Fisher General Electric Gold Star Hitachi J.C.Penney JVC KMC Magnavox Marantz

Code number 01 04 04 12 03 12 12 03,04,14 11 06,10 03,04,17 02,03 04,12 09 03 03,08,12 04,13

Manufacture Philco Philips Pioneer Portland Quasar Radio Shack RCA Sampo Samsung Sanyo Scott Sears Sharp Sylvania Teknika Toshiba Wards

Code number 03,04 08,21 16 03 06,18 05,14 04,10 12 20 11 12 07,10,11 03,05,18 08,12 03,08,14 07 03,04,12

By pressing [/ 1 VOL (volume) +/ TV/VIDEO

You can Turn the TV on or off Adjust the volume of the TV Switch the TVs input source between the TV and other input sources Select the channel of the TV

Number buttons and ENTER

Controlling the volume of your AV amplifier (receiver) with the remote


TV/DVD [/1
1 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

Number buttons

4 7

VOL +/

Using Various Additional Functions

MGA/Mitsubishi 04,12,13,17 Yorx

12 15

Controlling TVs with the remote


TV/DVD
1 2 5 8 0 3 6 9

NEC Panasonic

04,12 06,19

Zenith

1 2

Slide the TV/DVD switch to DVD. Hold down [/1, and enter your AV amplifier (receiver)s manufacturers code (see the table below) using the number button. Release [/1.

[/1
4 7

Number buttons

TV/VIDEO VOL +/

Controlling the TV When you set the TV/DVD switch to TV, you can control the sound level, input source, channel selection and power switch of your TV with the supplied remote.
TV/DVD [/1
1 2 5 8 0 3 6 9 4 7

1 2 3

Slide the TV/DVD switch to TV. Hold down [/1, and enter your TVs manufacturers code (see the table below) using the number buttons. Release [/1.
Number buttons

TV/VIDEO VOL +/ ENTER

Code numbers of controllable AV amplifier (receiver) If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your AV amplifier (receiver).

Code numbers of controllable TVs If more than one code number is listed, try entering them one at a time until you find the one that works with your TV.
continued

64

65

1-15

Settings and Adjustments


Manufacturer Sony Denon Kenwood Onkyo Pioneer Sansui Technics Yamaha Code number 91, 89 84, 85, 86 92, 93 81, 82, 83 99 87 97, 98 94, 95, 96

Using the Setup Display


By using the Setup Display, you can make various adjustments to items such as picture and sound. You can also set a language for the subtitles and the Setup Display, among other things. For details on each Setup Display item see page 68. For an overall list of Setup Display items, see page 83.

LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE:

ENGLISH ENGLISH ORIGINAL ENGLISH

Controlling the AV amplifiers (receivers) When you set the TV/DVD switch to DVD, you can control the volume of the AV amplifier (receiver) using VOL +/. Note
Depending on the AV amplifier (receiver), you may not be able to control your AV amplifier (receiver).

How to use the Setup Display

Press X/x to select the setup item from the displayed list: LANGUAGE SETUP, SCREEN SETUP, CUSTOM SETUP, or AUDIO SETUP. Then press ENTER. The selected setup item appears. Example: SCREEN SETUP
Selected item

X/x ENTER DISPLAY Setup items

SCREEN SETUP 4:3 LETTER BOX TV TYPE: ON SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: JACKET PICTURE COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE MODE: AUTO

1 2

Press DISPLAY when the player is in stop mode. The Control Menu appears. Press X/x to select (SETUP), then press ENTER. The options for SETUP appear.
( 47 ) : : STOP DVD

Select an item using X/x, then press ENTER. The options for the selected item appear. Example: TV TYPE
SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: MODE: 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN 16:9 AUTO

Settings and Adjustments

Options

QUICK CUSTOM RESET QUICK

Press X/x to select CUSTOM, then press ENTER. The Setup Display appears.

continued

66

67

Select a setting using X/x, then press ENTER. The setting is selected and setup is complete. Example: 16:9
Selected setting
SCREEN SETUP TV TYPE: SCREEN SAVER: BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: MODE:

Setting the Display or Sound Track Language


(LANGUAGE SETUP)

z If you select OTHERS t in DVD MENU, SUBTITLE, and AUDIO, select and enter a language code from the Language code list (page 82) using the number buttons. After you have made a selection, the language code (4 digits) is displayed the next time you select OTHERS t. Note

Settings for the Display


(SCREEN SETUP)
Choose settings according to the TV to be connected. Select SCREEN SETUP in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see Using the Setup Display (page 67). The default settings are underlined.
SCREEN SETUP 4:3 LETTER BOX TV TYPE: ON SCREEN SAVER: JACKET PICTURE BACKGROUND: COMPONENT OUT: INTERLACE MODE: AUTO

16:9 ON JACKETPICTURE INTERLACE AUTO

LANGUAGE SETUP allows you to set various languages for the on-screen display or sound track. Select LANGUAGE SETUP in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see Using the Setup Display (page 67).
LANGUAGE SETUP OSD: DVD MENU: AUDIO: SUBTITLE: ENGLISH ENGLISH ORIGINAL ENGLISH

When you select a language that is not recorded on the DVD, one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected (except for the OSD).

To turn off the Setup Display Press DISPLAY repeatedly until the Setup Display is turned off. z If you select QUICK in Step 3, you will enter the Quick Setup mode (page 25). Follow from Step 5 of the Quick Setup explanation to make basic adjustments. z If you select RESET in Step 3, you can reset all of the SETUP settings on page 83 and 84 (except for PARENTAL CONTROL) to the default settings. After you select RESET and press ENTER, select YES and press ENTER to reset the settings (it takes a few seconds to complete), or select NO and press ENTER to return to the Control Menu. Do not press POWER or [/1 when resetting the player.

x TV TYPE (DVD only) Selects the aspect ratio of the connected TV (4:3 standard or wide). x OSD (On-Screen Display) Switches the display language on the screen. Select the language from the displayed list. x DVD MENU (DVD only) You can select the desired language for the DVD menu. x AUDIO (DVD only) Switches the language of the sound track. Select the language from the displayed list. When you select ORIGINAL, the language given priority in the disc is selected. x SUBTITLE (DVD only) Switches the language of the subtitle recorded on the DVD. Select the language from the displayed list. When you select AUDIO FOLLOW, the language for the subtitles changes according to the language you selected for the sound track.
4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen. Select this when you connect a 4:3 screen TV. Automatically displays the wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit. Select this when you connect a wide-screen TV or a TV with a wide mode function.

Settings and Adjustments

16:9

continued

68

69

1-16

BLACK
4:3 LETTER BOX

The background color is black.

4:3 PAN SCAN

x COMPONENT OUT This will change the type of signal output from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks on the player. See page 71 for more information about the different types.
INTERLACE This outputs the signal in interlace format. Select this when you are connected to a standard (interlace format) TV.

16:9

second. Film based software is derived from film and displays images at 24 frames per second. In order for these images to appear natural on your screen when output in PROGRESSIVE mode (60 frames per second), the progressive video signal needs to be converted to match the type of DVD software that you are watching. For more information about conversion modes, see Progressive Conversion Methods of Film Based and Video Based Software.
AUTO This will automatically detect if you are playing Film based or Video based software and convert the signal to the appropriate conversion mode. Normally select this position. This will set the conversion mode for Video based software, regardless of the type of software that you are playing.

Progressive Conversion Methods of Film Based and Video Based Software


This player converts video based software and film based software in the following manner. Video based software conversion Video shows an image by alternately displaying every other line of an image (field) at 30 frames (60 fields) per second (Interlace format).

Note
Depending on the DVD, 4:3 LETTER BOX maybe selected automatically instead of 4:3 PAN SCAN or vice versa.

PROGRESSIVE This outputs the signal in progressive (480p) format. Select this when you have a TV that can accept progressive signals. VIDEO

x SCREEN SAVER Turns on and off the screen saver so that the screen saver image appears when you leave the player in pause or stop mode for 15 minutes, or when you play back a CD for more than 15 minutes. The screen saver will help prevent your display device from becoming damaged (ghosting). Press H to turn off the screen saver.
ON OFF Turns on the screen saver. Turns off the screen saver.

z When the player outputs a Progressive video


signal, the PROGRESSIVE indicator lights up.

Note
If you select PROGRESSIVE when you connect the player to a TV that cannot accept the signal in progressive format (480p), the image quality will deteriorate. In this case, set the VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT switch on the back panel of the player to INTERLACE. Then set COMPONENT OUT to INTERLACE when you can see the TV screen correctly, and reset VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT to SELECTABLE.

Notes
Some DVD software contains both Video and Film. For instance, DVDs of movies may contain the movie taken on film, and a Making of sequence taken on video. When you play video based software with progressive signals, sections of some types of images may appear unnatural due to the conversion process when output through the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks. Images from the S VIDEO OUT and LINE OUT (VIDEO) 1/2 jacks are unaffected as they are output in the interlace format.

The Interlace format displays 30 frames (60 fields) per second by displaying every other line of the image, causing scanning lines to appear across the image. Furthermore, since only half of the image is shown at once, the amount of information contained in an image is limited.

Settings and Adjustments

x BACKGROUND Selects the background color or picture on the TV screen in stop mode or while playing a CD.
JACKET PICTURE The jacket picture (still picture) appears in the background, but only when the jacket picture is already recorded on the disc (CD-EXTRA, etc.). If the disc does not contain a jacket picture, the GRAPHICS picture appears. A preset picture stored in the player appears in the background. The background color is blue.

When PROGRESSIVE is selected in COMPONENT OUT


You can fine-tune the Progressive (480p) video signal output when you select PROGRESSIVE in COMPONENT OUT of the CUSTOM SETUP display and connect the player to the TV that is able to accept the video signal in progressive format (480p). x MODE (Conversion Modes) DVD software can be divided into two types: film based software and video based software. Video based software is derived from TV, such as dramas and sit-coms, and displays images at 30 frames/60 fields per

GRAPHICS

The Progressive format displays 60 entire frames per seconds. The player accomplishes this by converting each field into a frame by using either a field-based conversion method or a frame-based conversion method. The appropriate method is automatically selected by the player according to the movement of the images on the screen. If the movement on the screen is slow, the frame-based conversion method borrows adjacent field information to fill in the missing information. If the movement on the screen is rapid, the field-based conversion method creates the missing information by predicting the movement of the images on the screen from field to field. The end result is an image that is higher in quality when compared to the Interlace format.
continued

BLUE

70

71

Interlace pictures

Custom Settings (CUSTOM


SETUP)
Allows setting up Parental Control and other settings.
Converted progressive pictures

x PAUSE MODE (DVD only) Selects the picture in pause mode.


AUTO The picture, including subjects that move dynamically, is output with no jitter. Normally select this position. The picture, including subjects that do not move dynamically, is output in high resolution.

on the player.

FRAME

x TRACK SELECTION (DVD only) Gives the sound track which contains the highest number of channels priority when you play a DVD on which multiple audio formats (PCM, DTS, or Dolby Digital format) are recorded.
OFF AUTO No priority given. Priority given.

Film based software conversion Film shows an image by displaying an entire image at 24 frames per second. When you watch a film on television, the television displays every other line of the frame as a field, thus reducing information level and the clarity of the film image.

Select CUSTOM SETUP in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see Using the Setup Display (page 67). The default settings are underlined.
CUSTOM SETUP AUTO PLAY: DIMMER: PAUSE MODE: PARENTAL CONTROL PLAYBACK MEMORY: TRACK SELECTION: OFF BRIGHT AUTO ON OFF

x PARENTAL CONTROL t (DVD only) Set a password and playback limitation level for DVDs with playback limitation for children. For details, see Limiting playback by children (Parental Control) (page 60). x PLAYBACK MEMORY The player can store the SUBTITLE and other settings of each disc for up to 50 discs (Playback Memory). Set the Playback Memory function ON or OFF.
ON OFF Stores the settings in memory when you eject the disc. Does not store the settings in memory.

Notes
When you set the item to AUTO, the language may change. The TRACK SELECTION setting has higher priority than the AUDIO settings in LANGUAGE SETUP (page 68). If you set DTS to OFF (page 75), the DTS sound track is not played even if you set TRACK SELECTION to AUTO. If PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks have the same number of channels, the player selects PCM, DTS, and Dolby Digital sound tracks in this order. Depending on the DVD, the audio channel with priority may be predetermined. In this case, you cannot give priority to the DTS or Dolby Digital format by selecting AUTO.

x AUTO PLAY Select the Auto Play setting when you turn on the player.
Interlace pictures

OFF

This player solves this problem by increasing the speed at which the frames are displayed, consecutively showing 3 identical frames followed by 2 identical frames in the time that it normally takes to show 2 consecutive frames. The end result is that the 24 frames per second are increased to 60 frames per second, which is the speed at which Progressive video signals are shown.

Does not use TIMER, DEMO1, or DEMO2 to start playback. Starts playing when the player is turned on. The player can start playback at any time when connected to a timer (not supplied). Set the timer when the player is in standby mode (the power indicator lights up in red). Starts playing the first demonstration automatically. Starts playing the second demonstration automatically.

Settings and Adjustments

TIMER

DEMO1 DEMO2

The following settings are stored in memory by the Playback Memory function. AUDIO (page 49)* BNR (page 55) DIGITAL VIDEO ENHANCER (page 58) SUBTITLE (page 54)* SURROUND (page 51) VIDEO EQUALIZER (page 56) *DVD only Notes
The player can store the settings of up to 50 discs. When you store the setting of disc number 51, the first disc setting is canceled. Depending on the DVD, the information stored in the disc takes priority over the Playback Memory settings and the function does not work. During playback, do not turn off the player by pressing POWER on the player. Doing so may cancel the settings. When you turn off the player, press x first to stop playback and then press [/1 on the remote. After the power indicator lights up in red and the player enters standby mode, press POWER

x DIMMER Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display.


Converted progressive pictures

This not only allows film to be shown in a frame based format, it also increases the clarity and sharpness which is unique to Progressive format images.

BRIGHT DARK OFF

Makes the front panel display bright. Makes the front panel display dark. Turns off the lighting of the front panel display.

72

73

1-17

Settings for the Sound


(AUDIO SETUP)
AUDIO SETUP allows you to set the sound according to the playback and connection conditions. Select AUDIO SETUP in the Setup Display. For details on using the display, see Using the Setup Display (page 67). The default settings are underlined.
AUDIO SETUP OFF AUDIO ATT: STANDARD AUDIO DRC: DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND DIGITAL OUT: ON D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF

STANDARD TV MODE

Normally, select this position. Makes the low sounds clear even if you turn the volume down. It is especially recommended when you listen to the sound using the speakers of the TV. Gives you the feeling of being at a live performance. When you use high quality speakers, it is even more effective.

x DIGITAL OUT Selects if DTS signals are output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks.
ON Normally, select this position. When you select ON, set DOLBY DIGITAL and DTS. For details on setting these items, see Setting the digital output signal. The player does not output the audio signals via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL and COAXIAL) jacks. The influence of the digital circuit upon the analog circuit is minimal.

D-PCM

WIDE RANGE

Select this when the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. You can select whether the signals conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) or not by making adjustments to the DOWNMIX item in AUDIO SETUP (page 74). Select this when the player is connected to an audio component with a built-in Dolby Digital decoder. If the player is connected to an audio component lacking a builtin Dolby Digital decoder, do not set this. Otherwise, when you play the Dolby Digital sound track, a loud noise (or no sound) will come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged.

OFF

DOLBY DIGITAL

x AUDIO ATT (attenuation) If the playback sound is distorted, set this item to ON. The player reduces the audio output level. This function affects the output of the following jacks: LINE OUT (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks
OFF ON Turns off the audio attenuation. Normally, select this position. Reduces the audio output level so that no sound distortion occurs. Select this when the playback sound from the speakers is distorted.

x DOWNMIX (DVD only) Switches the mixing down methods when you play a DVD on which rear signal components such as LS, RS, or S are recorded in Dolby Digital format. For details on the rear signal components, see Changing the Sound (page 49). This function affects the output of the following jacks: LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXICAL) jacks when DOLBY DIGITAL is set to D-PCM (page 75).
DOLBY SURROUND Select this when the player is connected to an audio component that conforms to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic). The output signals which reproduce the Dolby Surround effect are downmixed to 2 channels. Select this when the player is connected to an audio component that does not conform to Dolby Surround (Pro Logic). All of the output signals are downmixed to 2 channels without the Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) effect.

Setting the digital output signal


Switches the method of outputting audio signals when you connect the following component using a optical or a coaxial digital cord via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks. Amplifier (receiver) with digital input jack Amplifier (receiver) with a built-in DTS or DOLBY DIGITAL decoder MD or DAT deck For connection details, see page 20. Select DOLBY DIGITAL and DTS after setting DIGITAL OUT to ON.
AUDIO SETUP AUDIO ATT: OFF AUDIO DRC: STANDARD DOWNMIX: DOLBY SURROUND DIGITAL OUT: ON D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL: DTS: OFF

Note
If you select one of the TVS settings while playing a DVD, the player does not output Dolby Digital signals from the DIGITAL OUT (COAXIAL and OPTICAL) jacks (when you set DOLBY DIGITAL in AUDIO SETUP to D-PCM).

Settings and Adjustments

x DTS Selects if DTS signals are output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks.
OFF Select this when the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in DTS decoder. Note, however, that the DTS signals contained in a CD are output even if OFF is selected. Select this when the player is connected to an audio component having a built-in DTS decoder. If the player is connected to an audio component lacking a built-in DTS decoder, do not set this. Otherwise, when you play the DTS sound track, a loud noise (or no sound) will come out from the speakers, affecting your ears or causing the speakers to be damaged.

NORMAL

x AUDIO DRC (Dynamic Range Control) (DVD only) Makes the sound clear when the volume is turned down when playing a DVD that has the AUDIO DRC function. This affects the output from the following jacks: LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks only when DOLBY DIGITAL is set to D-PCM (page 75).

x DOLBY DIGITAL Selects the Dolby Digital signals output via the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks.

ON

74
Additional Information

75

Troubleshooting
If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the player, use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs. Should any problem persist, consult your nearest Sony dealer.

, Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format (480p) signals, the image may be affected when you set COMPONENT OUT to PROGRESSIVE. In this case, set COMPONENT OUT to INTERLACE.

Operation
The remote does not function.
, There are obstacles between the remote and the player. , The distance between the remote and the player is too far. , The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the player. , The batteries in the remote are weak.

Playback stops automatically.


, Some discs may contain an auto pause signal. While playing such a disc, the player stops playback at the auto pause signal.

Even though you set the aspect ratio in TV TYPE of SCREEN SETUP, the picture does not fill the screen.
, The aspect ratio of the disc is fixed on your DVD.

You cannot perform some functions such as Stop, Search, Slow-motion Play, Repeat Play, Shuffle Play, or Program Play.
, Depending on the disc, you may not be able to do some of the operations above. See the operating manual that comes with the disc.

Power
The power is not turned on.
, Check that the AC power cord is connected securely.

The disc does not play.


, There is no disc inside. , The disc is turned over. Insert the disc with the playback side facing down on the disc tray. , The disc is skewed. , The player cannot play CD-ROMs, etc. (page 6). , The region code on the DVD does not match the player. , Moisture has condensed inside the player. Remove the disc and leave the player turned on for about half an hour. Turn on the power again before playing the disc (page 3).

Sound
There is no sound.

Picture
There is no picture.
, The connecting cords are not connected securely. , The connecting cords are damaged. , The player is not connected to the correct TV input jack (page 18). , The video input on the TV is not correctly set.

Picture noise appears.


, The disc is dirty or flawed. , If the picture output from your player goes through your VCR to get to your TV, the copyprotection signal applied to some DVD programs could affect picture quality. If you still experience problems even when you connect your player directly to your TV, please try connecting your player to your TVs S video input (page 18). , You have selected PROGRESSIVE in COMPONENT OUT even though your TV cannot accept the signal in progressive format. In this case, set the VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT switch on the back panel of the player to INTERLACE. Then set COMPONENT OUT to INTERLACE after you can see the TV screen correctly and reset VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT to SELECTABLE.

, The connecting cord is not connected securely. , The connecting cord is damaged. , The player is connected to the wrong input jack on the amplifier (receiver) (page 22, 23, 24). , The amplifier (receiver) input is not correctly set to the player. , The player is in pause mode or in Slow-motion play mode. , The player is in fast forward or fast reverse mode. , If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks, check the audio settings (page 75).

Messages do not appear on the screen in the language you want.


, In the Setup Display, select the desired language for the on-screen display in OSD under LANGUAGE SETUP (page 68).

The language for the sound track cannot be changed.


, Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played. , The DVD prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track.

Additional Information

The disc does not start playing from the beginning.


, Program Play, Shuffle Play, Repeat Play, or A-B Repeat Play has been selected (page 34). Press CLEAR to cancel these functions before playing a disc. , Resume Play has been selected. During stop, press x on the player or the remote and then start playback (page 31). , The title, DVD, or PBC menu automatically appears on the TV screen.

The subtitle language cannot be changed.


, Multilingual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD being played. , The DVD prohibits the changing of the subtitles.

Sound is noisy.
, The disc is dirty or flawed. , When playing a CD with DTS sound tracks, noise will come from the LINE OUT L/R (AUDIO) 1/2 jacks (page 30).

The subtitle cannot be turned off.


, The DVD prohibits the subtitles being turned off.

Sound distortion occurs.


, Set AUDIO ATT in AUDIO SETUP to ON (page 74).

The player starts playing the disc automatically.


, The DVD features an auto playback function. , AUTO PLAY in CUSTOM SETUP is set to TIMER (page 72).

continued

76

77

1-18

The angles cannot be changed.


, Multi-angles are not recorded on the DVD being played. The angle can only be changed when the ANGLE indicator lights up on the front panel display (page 9). , The DVD prohibits changing of the angles.

Self-diagnosis Function
(When letters/numbers appear in the display)
When the self-diagnosis function is activated to prevent the player from malfunctioning, a five-character service number (e.g., C 13 00) with a combination of a letter and four digits appears on the screen and the front panel display. In this case, check the following table.
C:13:00

Glossary
Chapter (page 9)

DVD (page 6)

The player does not operate properly.


, When static electricity, etc., causes the player to operate abnormally, press POWER on the player to turn the player off and then on again.

Sections of a picture or a music feature that are smaller than titles. A title is composed of several chapters. Depending on the disc, no chapters may be recorded.
Dolby Digital (page 24, 75)

Nothing is displayed on the front panel display.


, DIMMER in CUSTOM SETUP is set to OFF. Set DIMMER to BRIGHT or DARK (page 72). First three characters of the service number C 13

5 numbers or letters are displayed on the screen and on the front panel display.
, The self-diagnosis function was activated. (See the table on page 78.)

Cause and/or Corrective Action

Digital audio compression technology developed by Dolby Laboratories. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. Dolby Digital provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio found in Dolby Digital cinema audio systems. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital.
Dolby Surround (Pro Logic) (page 23)

The disc is dirty. , Clean the disc with a soft cloth (page 7). The disc is not inserted correctly. , Re-insert the disc correctly.

The disc tray does not open and LOCKED appears on the front panel display.
, Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

C 31

Audio signal processing technology that Dolby Laboratories developed for surround sound. When the input signal contains a surround component, the Pro Logic process outputs the front, center, and rear signals. The rear channel is monaural.
DTS (page 24, 75)

A disc that contains up to 8 hours of moving pictures even though its diameter is the same as a CD. The data capacity of a single-layer and single-sided DVD is 4.7 GB (Giga Byte), which is 7 times that of a CD. The data capacity of a double-layer and single-sided DVD is 8.5 GB, a single-layer and doublesided DVD is 9.4 GB, and double-layer and double-sided DVD is 17GB. The picture data uses the MPEG 2 format, one of the worldwide standards of digital compression technology. The picture data is compressed to about 1/40 (average) of its original size. The DVD also uses a variable rate coding technology that changes the data to be allocated according to the status of the picture. Audio information is recorded in Dolby Digital as well as in PCM, allowing you to enjoy a more real audio presence. Furthermore, various advanced functions such as the multi-angle, multilingual, and Parental Control functions are provided with the DVD.
Film based software (page 71)

E XX To prevent a malfunction, the (xx is a number) CD/DVD player has performed the self-diagnosis function. , Contact your nearest Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility and give the 5-character service number. Example: E 61 10

DVDs can be classified as Film based or Video based software. Film based DVDs contain the same images (24 frames per second) that are shown at movie theaters.
Interlace format (page 70)

Additional Information

Digital audio compression technology that Digital Theater Systems, Inc. developed. This technology conforms to 5.1-channel surround sound. The rear channel is stereo and there is a discrete subwoofer channel in this format. DTS provides the same 5.1 discrete channels of high quality digital audio. Good channel separation is realized because all of the channel data is recorded discretely and little deterioration is realized because all channel data processing is digital.

Interlace format shows every other line of an image as a single field and is the standard method for displaying images on television. The even number field shows the even numbered lines of an image, and the odd numbered field shows the odd numbered lines of an image.
Index (CD)/Video Index (VIDEO CD) (page 9)

A number that divides a track into sections to easily locate the point you want on a VIDEO CD or CD. Depending on the disc, no index may be recorded.
continued

78

79

Parental Control (page 60)

Track (page 9)

A function of the DVD used to limit playback of the disc according to the age of the user and the limitation level in each country. The limitation varies from disc to disc; when it is activated, or playback is completely prohibited, violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes, etc.
Progressive format (page 70)

Sections of a picture or a music feature on a VIDEO CD or CD (the length of a song).


TV Virtual Surround (TVS) (page 51)

Language Code List


For details, see page 49, 54, 68. The language spellings conform to the ISO 639: 1988 (E/F) standard.
Code Language 1027 1028 1032 1039 1044 1045 1051 1052 1053 1057 1059 1060 1061 1066 1067 1070 1079 1093 1097 1103 1105 1109 1130 1142 1144 1145 1149 1150 1151 1157 1165 1166 1171 1174 1181 Afar Abkhazian Afrikaans Amharic Arabic Assamese Aymara Azerbaijani Bashkir Byelorussian Bulgarian Bihari Bislama Bengali; Bangla Tibetan Breton Catalan Corsican Czech Welsh Danish German Bhutani Greek English Esperanto Spanish Estonian Basque Persian Finnish Fiji Faroese French Frisian Code Language 1183 1186 1194 1196 1203 1209 1217 1226 1229 1233 1235 1239 1245 1248 1253 1254 1257 1261 1269 1283 1287 1297 1298 1299 1300 1301 1305 1307 1311 1313 1326 1327 1332 1334 1345 Irish Scots Gaelic Galician Guarani Gujarati Hausa Hindi Croatian Hungarian Armenian Interlingua Interlingue Inupiak Indonesian Icelandic Italian Hebrew Japanese Yiddish Javanese Georgian Kazakh Greenlandic Cambodian Kannada Korean Kashmiri Kurdish Kirghiz Latin Lingala Laothian Lithuanian Latvian; Lettish Malagasy Code Language 1347 1349 1350 1352 1353 1356 1357 1358 1363 1365 1369 1376 1379 1393 1403 1408 1417 1428 1435 1436 1463 1481 1482 1483 1489 1491 1495 1498 1501 1502 1503 1505 1506 Maori Macedonian Malayalam Mongolian Moldavian Marathi Malay Maltese Burmese Nauru Nepali Dutch Norwegian Occitan (Afan)Oromo Oriya Punjabi Polish Pashto; Pushto Portuguese Quechua RhaetoRomance Kirundi Romanian Russian Kinyarwanda Sanskrit Sindhi Sangho Serbo-Croatian Singhalese Slovak Slovenian Code Language 1507 1508 1509 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1521 1525 1527 1528 1529 1531 1532 1534 1535 1538 1539 1540 1543 1557 1564 1572 1581 1587 1613 1632 1665 1684 1697 Samoan Shona Somali Albanian Serbian Siswati Sesotho Sundanese Swedish Swahili Tamil Telugu Tajik Thai Tigrinya Turkmen Tagalog Setswana Tonga Turkish Tsonga Tatar Twi Ukrainian Urdu Uzbek Vietnamese Volapk Wolof Xhosa Yoruba Chinese Zulu

Compared to the Interlace format that alternately shows every other line of an image (field) to create one frame, the Progressive format shows the entire image at once as a single frame. This means that while the Interlace format can show 30 frames (60 fields) in one second, the Progressive format can show 60 frames in one second. The overall picture quality increases and still images, text, and horizontal lines appear sharper. This player is compatible with the 480 progressive format.
Region Code (page 6)

Technology from Sony developed to produce surround sound for home use using just a stereo TV. Designed to work with the sound characteristics of your TV, this technology brings the excitement of surround sound to your home using nothing more than your stereo TVs internal speakers. Furthermore, various TVS modes are available. For example, TVS WIDE uses just two speakers to create a virtual sound environment that makes you feel like you are surrounded by multiple speakers.
Video based software (page 71)

DVDs can be classified as Film based or Video based software. Television dramas or sit-coms are examples of Video based software and display images at 30 frames (or 60 fields) per second.

This system is used to protect the copyrights. A region number is allocated on each DVD player or DVD disc according to the sales region. Each region code is shown on the player as well as on the disc packaging. The player can play the discs that match its region code. The player can also play discs with the ALL mark. Even when the region code is not shown on the DVD, the region limit may still be activated.
Scene (page 9)

On a VIDEO CD with PBC (playback control) functions, the menu screens, moving pictures and still pictures are divided into sections called scenes.
Title (page 9)

1703 Not specified

The longest section of a picture or music feature on a DVD, movie, etc., in video software, or the entire album in audio software.

80

82

1-19

CUSTOM SETUP (page 72)

List of Setup Display Items


The default settings are underlined.
LANGUAGE SETUP (page 68) OSD ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE ENGLISH FRENCH SPANISH PORTUGUESE GERMAN ITALIAN DUTCH CHINESE JAPANESE DANISH SWEDISH FINNISH NORWEGIAN RUSSIAN OTHERS t ORIGINAL (All other selections are the same as the DVD MENU language.) AUDIO FOLLOW (All other selections are the same as the DVD MENU language.)

AUTO PLAY

OFF TIMER DEMO1 DEMO2 BRIGHT DARK OFF AUTO FRAME

DIMMER

PAUSE MODE PARENTAL CONTROL t PLAYBACK MEMORY TRACK SELECTION

DVD MENU

ON OFF OFF AUTO

AUDIO SETUP (page 74) AUDIO ATT AUDIO DRC OFF ON STANDARD TV MODE WIDE RANGE DOLBY SURROUND NORMAL ON DOLBY DIGITAL D-PCM DOLBY DIGITAL DTS OFF OFF ON

DOWNMIX DIGITAL OUT

AUDIO SUBTITLE

Additional Information

SCREEN SETUP (page 69) TV TYPE 4:3 LETTER BOX 4:3 PAN SCAN 16:9 ON OFF JACKET PICTURE GRAPHICS BLUE BLACK INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE MODE AUTO VIDEO

SCREEN SAVER BACKGROUND

COMPONENT OUT

continued

83

84

1-20 E 1-20

DVP-NS700P SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY


Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. CASE REMOVAL


4 Case 1 Three tapping screws 2 Tapping screw

2-3. MB-100 BOARD REMOVAL


1 Three flexible flat cables (FMO-001: CN201/ FMO-002: CN202/ FMM-035: CN402) 3 Five screws (B3)

4 MB-100 board 3 Tapping screw

2 Connector (CN101)

2-2. AV-58 BOARD REMOVAL

2-4. TRAY COVER REMOVAL

4 AV-58 board

3 Two claws 4 Tray cover

2 Connector (CN202)

1 Two flexible flat cables (FMAV-003: CN102/ FMA-029: CN203) 3 Six screws (B3)

B 2 Pull the tray in the direction of arrow B. A

1 Insert a tapering driver into the aperture of the unit bottom, and move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of arrow A.

2-1

2-5. FRONT PANEL REMOVAL


1 Connector (CN402) 4 Claw

2-7. RM-85 BOARD REMOVAL


1 Flexible flat cables (FIR-003: CN501) 2 Screw (B3)

3 RM-85 board

5 Front panel

3 Two claws 2 Claw

2-6. POWER BLOCK REMOVAL

2-8. MECHANISM DECK REMOVAL

1 Connector (CN101) 3 Two screws (WHD B3)

2 Three screws (B3)

4 Two screws (WHD B3)

3 Mechanism deck

5 Joint (POWER)

6 Power block

2 Connector (CN201)

1 Three flexible flat cables (FMO-001: CN201/ FMO-002: CN202/ FMM-035: CN402)

2-2

2-9. IF-83 BOARD REMOVAL


3 Two screws (B3) 4 Multi pillar 2 Connector (CN201)

2-11. LOADING MOTOR (M001), MS-81 BOARD REMOVAL


1 BELT

5 Three screws (B3)


2 Two screws (P2.6 x 4)

1 Flexible flat cable (FIR-003: CN406) 2 Connector (CN101)


3 Two claws

6 IF-83 board

4 Loading motor (M001), MS-81 board

2-10. TRAY REMOVAL

2-12. OPTICAL PICK-UP REMOVAL

3 Claw

4 Tray 3 Claw
2 Insulator

A
2 Insulator 1 Insulator screw

1 Move the lever of chuck cam in the direction of arrow A.


1 Insulator screw

2 Insulator 1 Insulator screw 3 Optical pick-up

2-3

2-13. INTERNAL VIEWS

DC motor (loading) 1-541-632-11

DC motor (loading) 1-541-632-11

Optical pick-up (KHM-240AAA/J1RP) 8-820-144-06

2-4

2-14. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) MS-81 (LOADING) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

2-5 2-5E

DVP-NS700P SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS


3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM
MB-100 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-11 to 4-30) IC504, 505 16M SDRAM

AV-58 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-35 to 4-38)

J103 V, Y, C

S VIDEO OUT

BASE UNIT
KHM-240AAA/J1RP OPTICAL DEVICE

IC303 16M DRAM IC102 PDO0 7 IC601 PDI0 7 IC503 IC202 RF DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO IC302 ARP, SERVO DSP RF+ SDI 0 7 AV DECODER IC901 GATE ARRAY Y0 7 CB0 7 CR0 7 Y, Cb, Cr IC001 I/P CONVERTER IC103 IC902 VIDEO ENCODER Y, Cb, Cr VIDEO SELECTOR IC104 VIDEO BUFFER J102 Y, Cb, Cr Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT BNR IC003 16M SDRAM Y, Cb, Cr VIDEO BUFFER J101 (1/2) VIDEO 2 VIDEO 1 LINE OUT

DVD/CD PD IC

PD0 7

CDDOUT, CDDATA, CDBCK, CDLRCK FOCUS COIL SPDIF, ACH12, ACH34, ACH56, BCK, LRCK

TRACKING COIL IC401 INLIMIT SENSOR SPINDLE MOTOR FOCUS/TRACKING COIL DRIVE, SPINDLE/SLED/ LOADING MOTOR DRIVE

PARALLEL BUS

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT SWITCH

J201 COAXIAL DIGITAL OUT

SPDIF IC107 or IC108 FLASH or ROM IC103

IC204

OPTICAL

SLED MOTOR

M
IC101 EEPROM

SYSTEM CONTROL

IC801 AUDIO DSP IC802 AUDIO D/A CONVERTER IC201 AUDIO AMP J101 (2/2) L AUDIO 2 R L AUDIO 1 R LINE OUT

S001 CHUCK/TRAY DETECT

+1.8V

MS-81 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-6)

+3.3V +5V +11V

EVER+3.3V AI+5V AU+11V SW11V

REG ND401 REG FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

5V

SERIAL BUS

+5V AU+5V

M001 LOADING MOTOR

RM-85 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-6)

HS13S0U BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-45) SW101 F101 AC IN POWER REG IC404 D101 SWITCHING REG EVER+3.3V SW+3.3V +5V SW+11V EVER+11V EVER11V P CON IF CON FUNCTION KEY

IC501 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER

SHUTTLE/ CURSOR STICK

IF-83 BOARD
05 (SEE PAGE 4-41)

PUSH ENTER

3-1

3-2

DVP-NS700P
3-2. RF/SERVO BLOCK DIAGRAM
IC202 2 (DVD play) 200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV IC202 2 (CD play) 200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV IC202 tl (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV IC202 tl (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV IC202 rs (DVD play) IC202 rs (CD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

570 mVp-p

550 mVp-p

1.4 Vp-p

1.4 Vp-p

180 mVp-p IC202 ra (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

860 mVp-p IC202 ra (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

BASE UNIT
KHM-240AAA/J1RP

MB-100 BOARD (1/5)


(SEE PAGE 4-11, 13, 19) IC202 DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO CN201 RF 22 24 25 17 16 2 RF IN 14 AD 11 7 A2 D2 10 EH 15 23 18 26 20 15 EH 18 19 VC SRD 45 SWD SCLK 48 SDEN DFT 38 MON 44 SSDFCTI SS MON FE 42 TE 41 PI 36 MIRR 33 TZC 37 FE TE PI SIGO 59

OPTICAL DEVICE

1.5 Vp-p

1.7 Vp-p RF+ SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-5)

AD

IC302 <zcn (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV 136 ADC1 135 ADC0 137 ADC2 197 MIRR 196 TZC

IC302 <zcn (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

DVD/CD PD IC

160 mVp-p

860 mVp-p

VC

IC302 <zcb (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

IC302 <zcb (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 mV/DIV

PD SW DVD LD

13 10 Q201 DVD LD DRIVE

21 DVDPD 22 CDPD 24 LEDSEL0 25 DVDLD

173 175 180

GIO6/SDI GIO7/SDO GIO8/SCK GIO13

1.4 Vp-p

1.7 Vp-p

DVD/CD LD MODULE

185 DFCTI 144 ADC7 172 GIO5/PGIN

CD LD VR

VCI 39 6 12 Q202 CD LD DRIVE 26 CDLD LDON 27

142 ADC5, 6 143

IC302 (1/2) SERVO DSP

166 GIO0/INT2 +3.3V IC401 42 40 VREF 43 FOCUS COIL FCS 4 3 37 36 FOCUS COIL DRIVE 48 1 FDRV 204 POM 2, 3 205

HINT 22 HCS 24 XDSPRST 156

XSDPIT XSDPCS XRST

19 TRK TRACKING COIL DRIVE TDRV

TRACKING COIL

2 1

35 34

3 4 5

202 POM 0, 1 203 139 ADC3 140 ADC4

SLE SPFG

GIO1/INT3

PS 39 SPINDLE MOTOR

159 161 167 198 199 168 176 177 200 MDSO, MDPO SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-7)

SPM

9 8

27 28

SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE

13

21 SLED MOTOR

SPMUTE SLDA, SLDB

SLA, SLB

1 4

32 29

SLED MOTOR DRIVE

7 10 20

PWM2

MDSO MDPO

45

PWM0, 1

INLIMIT SENSOR

INLIM

47 46

GIO2/INT4

CN202

GIO9/FGREF GIO10/FGIN

XDRVMUTE

MS-81 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-6)


M001 LOADING MOTOR CN001 CN402 1 2 LDM 5 4 25 24

TSD-M 22

TSD

LOADING MOTOR DRIVE

16 17 15

LMP, LMM

LMCTL XLDON CKSW1 OCSW1

S001 CHUCK/TRAY DETECT 05 4 5 CKSW1 OCSW1 2 1

3-3

3-4

DVP-NS700P

3-3. SIGNAL PROCESSOR BLOCK DIAGRAM


MB-100 BOARD (2/5)
(SEE PAGE 4-13 to 4-18) IC504, 505 16M SDRAM IC303 16M DRAM

ADAD 0 11

ADDT 0 15

CLK, CKE, DQML, DQMU,

IC302 <zcz (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 100 ns/DIV

MEMD 0 15

MEMA 0 9

OE, WE, RAS LCAS, UCAS

CS, WE, CAS, RAS

124 125 127 128 130 131 133 134 136 137 139 140

157 160 162 165 167 168 170 171 173 174 176 177 SDDT 0 15 IC503 yd

143 144 146 147 149 151 152 154 155

IC503 yl

1.4 Vp-p

27 36 MA 0 9

44 51 53 60 MD 0 15

38 39 41 42

940 mVp-p (H) CN801 (1/3) G OUT 69 Y/G CB/R CR/B COMPOUT YOUT COUT 8 10 12 2 6 4 Y/G Cb/R Cr/B V Y C

RF/SERVO (SEE PAGE 3-4)

RF+

131 RFIN1 128 RFIN2

73 SD 0 7 76 78 81 SDCK XSHD 68 XSRQ XSAK 72 SDEF IC302 (2/2) ARP

SDI 0 7

31 34 DTI 0 7 36 39 41 43 46 ICLKI IERRI ISTARTI IVALI IREQO

620 mVp-p (H) IC503 yh

R OUT 63 B OUT 66 COMPOUT 80

IC302 <zx, (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

SDCK, XSHD, XSRQ, XSAK, SDEF

VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-10)

620 mVp-p (H) IC503 i;

Y OUT 74 C OUT 77 IC503 uj

1.4 Vp-p

DATA BCLK LRCK DOUT

62 63 65 66

CDDATA, CDBCK, CDLRCK, CDDOUT

22 23 25 26

CDIN2I CDIN1I CDBCKI CDLRKI

1.1 Vp-p (H) 21 XINT 23 XCS 25 XWAT 157 182 187 189 XARPRST CLKIN MCKI SCKI 11 A 0 7 15 17 19 D07 2 9 192 193 195 198 200 203 205 208 210 213 215 218 25 7 10 232 235 237 240 118 120 119 121 122 TDI TCK TDO TMS TRST IC503 uf HAD 0 21 102 105 107 110 92 95 97 100 810 mVp-p (H) IC601 BNR 23 24 26 28 YCIN 0 7 30 32 9 11 14 18 YCOUT 0 7

XARPIT XARPCS XWAIT XARPRST 33MARP

HA 0 7

HA 0 21

940 mVp-p (H) HD 8 15 HD 0 15 HD 0 15 IC503

PDO 0 7

PDO 0 7

PDI 0 7

PDI 0 7

XWRH XRD

207 XWR 208 XRD

CK27
5

IC503 ik

TRST

LAND (FOR J TAG)

XRD XWRH

220 HCSB 221 HRWB

3.2 Vp-p (H)

D1CLKO 60 50 DV 00 07 53 55 58

27MVGA32

MRST
7 27MCLK VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-9)

TDO TCK TDI TMS TRST

195 194 193 192 191

AV DECODER FLDO NRSDOUT NRSENB HSYNCO 87 112 113 88 8 2 3 1 FID NRSDIN SCS H SYNC

SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-7)

HA 0 21 HD 0 15

HA 0 21 HD 0 15

PD 0 7

PD 0 7

XRST 512FSAVD 33MAVD XAVDCS2 XAVDCS3 27MAVD

231 RSTB 12 ACLK 29 CRPCLKI 190 HAD23 191 HAD22 180 182 224 223 CLKI SCLKI HWAIT0B HIREQ0

ACH12 ACH34 ACH56 LRCKO BCKO DO

14 15 16 18 19 20

ACH12 ACH34 ACH56 LRCK BCK SPDIF

AUDIO (SEE PAGE 3-11)

VREFI 84

DM ACK1 DM REQ1 DM ACK0 DM REQ0

RV501 VIDEO LEVEL ADJ

XAVDIT

226 229 XRST DREQ0 DACK0 DREQ1 DACK1

05

3-5

3-6

DVP-NS700P
3-4. SYSTEM CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

MB-100 BOARD (3/5)


(SEE PAGE 4-21 to 4-24) IC107 or IC108 ROM

FLASH or

HA 0 21 HD 0 15

HA 0 21 HD 0 15

HA1 21

HA0 21

HD0 15

HD0 15

IC103 tf 58

1 5 102 109 111 118 120 HA 0 21 XRD XWRH SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-5) XARPRST XARPIT XARPCS XWAIT XRST 36 17 62 67 35 XARPRST INT1 CS4X XWAIT XRST 70 XRD 71 XWRH

85 100 HD 0 15

CSOX

X1 53 X0 54 X101 16.5MHz

1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)

WIDE 82 AN3 15 XRST XSDPIT XSDPCS XDRVMUTE XLDON CKSW1 OCSW1 IC101 EEPROM WP SCL SDA VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-9) PRRESET SCL SDA XAVDIT DREQ0 DACK0 DREQ1 DACK1 XAVDCS2 XAVDCS3 16 46 47 49 50 60 61 INTO DREQ0 DACK0 DREQ1 DACK1 CS2X CS3X MAMUTE VESCS/X39CS SI1 SO1 SC1 XDACS 83 80 28 29 30 79 7 6 5 7 WP 39 SCL 38 SDA SI0 SO0 SCO XIFCS INT4 XFRRST 25 26 27 51 20 76 18 63 48 84 56 57 INT2 CS5X XDRVMUTE XLDON CKSW1 OCSW1

WIDE IPSW

CN801 (2/3) 1 3 WIDE IPSW VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-10)

RF/SERVO (SEE PAGE 3-4)

IC103 SYSTEM CONTROL CN101 SI0 SO0 SC0 XIFCS IFBSY TRST 12 13 14 11 10 9 SI0 SO0 SC0 XIFCS XIFBUSY XFRRST

INTERFACE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-13)

81 TRST XRST AUDIO (SEE PAGE 3-11)

48/44.1k

MAMUTE X39CS/XVESCS SI1 SO1 SC1 XDACS

IC102 7

SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-5)

IC102 IC102 qd, qg PLL 1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz) 14 FSEL 3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz) 33MARP 33MAVD 27MAVD 15 33-1OUT 13 33-2OUT 3 27-1OUT IC102 3 512FSAVD XTI 7 X102 27MHz XTO 8 512-2OUT 9 512-1OUT 10 DVD: 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz) CD: 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz) 512FS2CH 512FS6CH IC102 9, 0

3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz) 05

3-7

3-8

DVP-NS700P
3-5. VIDEO BLOCK DIAGRAM
AV-58 BOARD (1/2)
(SEE PAGE 4-35) IC102 VIDEO BUFFER CN203 (1/2) V 19 3 VIDEO IN VIDEO 33 OUT IC102 wl 2.4 Vp-p (H) VIDEO 2 IC102 ea J103 VIDEO 1 LINE OUT IC102 ed

J101 (2/2)

23

8 Y IN

Y OUT 29

2.0 Vp-p (H)

1.8 Vp-p (H)

Y C

MB-100 BOARD (4/5)


(SEE PAGE 4-27 to 4-30)

IC001 I/P CONVERTER

SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-6)

21

6 C IN 7 MUTE1

C OUT 31 IC102 wf

S VIDEO OUT Y C

16 MUTE2 12 SDA 13 SCL 179 RESET IC901 GATE ARRAY 83 89 GBE 0 7 96 101 GGE 0 7 97 103 105 GRE 0 7 ADCLK IHD IVD IFD 107 | 114 92 93 94 95 GBE 0 7 200 | 207 184 | 191 159 | 166 181 177 178 176 BL 10 17 107 | 114 MA 00 10 116 | 118 126 | 129 MD 00 15 132 | 143 Y/G A 0 10 Cb/R Cr/B IC003 16M SDRAM DQ 0 15 SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-8) INTERFACE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-13) IC001 <zvm WIDE IPSW 29 27 CN202 (1/2) VMUTE 1 SELECTABLE +5V INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE 1.6 Vp-p (66 MHz) IC004 2 X001 66MHz 2 IC002 4 R164, 167 6.5dB IC902 ef R163, 166 6.5dB 2 0Y IC104 qg 5 0Z 2.2 Vp-p (H) 1.0 Vp-p (H) DSEL 5 IC902 VIDEO ENCODER 125 Y 0 7 132 137 139 CB 0 7 140 144 24 4 | Y29 11 42 | U29 49 16 | V29 23 25 29 28 27 Q902, 904, 907 BUFFER, 54M FILTER Q901, 905 BUFFER, 54M FILTER
Q903, 906 BUFFER, 54M FILTER

25 27 29

12 Y IN 15 Cb IN 17 Cr IN

Y OUT 24 Cb OUT 22 Cr OUT 20

2.0 Vp-p (H) IC102 ws

1.3 Vp-p (H) Q104, 105 WIDE SWITCH IC102 w;

GGE 0 7

GL 10 17

SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-7)

SDA SCL PRRESET

6 SDA 7 SCL 8 RESET

GRE 0 7

SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-6)

PD 0 7

PD 0 7

10 | YCIN 0 7 17 20 CLK27M

MBA0, RMDQM, 119 RL 10 17 RMCS, RMRAS, | RMCAS, RMWE 124 ADCLK IHD DSCLK 147 IVD IFLD

1.3 Vp-p (H)

VIDEO OUT SCAN SELECT

27MCLK

BL 00 07 BR 00 07 GL 00 07

74 80 82 64 65 67 72

BL 00 07 BR 00 07 GL 00 07 GR 00 07 RL 00 07 RR 00 07

43 | BL 00 07 50 54 59 BR 00 07 61 62 63 65 67 71 GL 00 07

IC103 VIDEO SELECTOR 4 R165, 168 6.5dB 12 0X

IC104 qd

50 51 53 59 63

GR 00 07 39 45 47 29 RL 00 07 31 37 RR 00 07 21 | 28

73 77 GR 00 07 80 82 83 84 RL 00 07 86 90 92 93 96 98 101 36 OCLK 38 OHD 39 OVD RR 00 07

1.6 Vp-p (H)

IC104 qa

1.6 Vp-p (H)

CLK135M 56 OHD 57 OVD 58

CN902 1 DSEL 9

CN102 Q106, 107 I/P SWITCH 9 A 10 B 11 C X COM 14 Y Q101 BUFFER Q102 BUFFER Q103 BUFFER 13 1X Y COM 15 Z COM 4

IC104 VIDEO BUFFER J102 1 Y IN 4 Cb IN 7 Cr IN Y OUT 15 Cb OUT 13 Cr OUT 11 Y PB/CB PR/CR COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y07

DAC A 34

CB 0 7

DAC B 36

Cb

1 1Y

116 CR 0 7 118 124 DCLK PHSYNC PVSYNC PBLANK 128 129 130 131

CR 0 7

DAC C 32

Cr

3 1Z

CLKIN HSYNC VSYNC BLANK/CLKOUT

IC902 eh

40 RESETB 30 SCL 31 SDA

750 mVp-p (H) RSET 38 IC902 es RV901

IC902 wg

IC902 wl

IC902 wk

IC902 wj

PROG. VIDEO LEVEL ADJ. 760 mVp-p (H)

4.2 Vp-p (66 MHz) 05

3.6 Vp-p (H)

3.2 Vp-p (V)

3.3 Vp-p (H)

3-9

3-10

DVP-NS700P

3-6. AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM

AV-58 BOARD (2/2) MB-100 BOARD (5/5)


(SEE PAGE 4-25) 1 D IN IC204 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT (SEE PAGE 4-37)

CN801 (3/3) SPDIF 23 SPDIF 7

CN203 (2/2) Q211 BUFFER

J201 COAXIAL

IC801 SIGNAL PROCESSOR (SEE PAGE 3-6) ACH12 ACH34 ACH56 LRCK BCK 6 7 8 5 9 AUDIO DSP SDI0 SDI1 SDI2 LRCKI BCKI IC802 AUDIO D/A CONVERTER SDO0 37 3 SDTI 2 BICK 4 LRCK 1 6 5 7 8 512FS6CH X39CS/XVESCS SI1 SO1 SC1 XRST SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-8) 3 11 17 13 14 MCLK XCS SO SI SCK MCLK CSN PDN CCLK CDTI AOUTL+ 12 AOUTL 11 AOUTR+ 10 AOUTR 9 18 16 22 24 ALT+ ALT ART+ ART 12 14 8 6 3 2 5 6 IC201 AUDIO AMP + + 1 Q208 MUTE Q207 MUTE J101 (2/2)

L AUDIO 1

R LINE OUT L AUDIO 2

DZFL 16

17

LMUTE

D202 13 Q202, 204, 205 MUTE DRIVE

48 XRST

CN202 (2/2) 15 MAMUTE 15 2 A MUTE

INTERFACE CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-13)

512FS2CH XDACS MAMUTE

05

3-11

3-12

DVP-NS700P

3-7. INTERFACE CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

IF-83 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-41) CN403 SI0 SO0 SC0 SYSTEM CONTROL (SEE PAGE 3-8) XIFCS XIFBUSY 12 13 14 11 10 SI0 SO0 SC0 XIFCS XIFBUSY 16 SO 15 SI 17 /SC 14 /CS 27 BUSY PROG 80 S404 XFRRST 9 XFRRST 7 /FRRST BNRKEY 33 SURROUND S401 BNR 1 PROG 5 D501 PROGRESSIVE IR 11 BUZ 21 BZ401 BUZZER CN406 5 SIRCS CN501 1 1 OUT

RM-85 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-6) IC501 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER

AUDIO (SEE PAGE 3-12)

CN404 A MUTE 2 23 /AMUTE

VIDEO (SEE PAGE 3-10)

VMUTE

24 /VMUTE O/C 34 IC404 D415 SURROUND IF CON 45 VES

S412

S410

S408

S406

S411 D414 BNR 79 BNR PLAY 35

S403

S409 DISPLAY

S407 DVD MENU

S405 RETURN

S402 TITLE

DISPLAY 36

SHUTTLE/ CURSOR STICK ND401 FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE 58 41 5 12 48 SEG 1 18 65 77 DIG 1 12 66 CN402 CURSOR 37 JOGCCW 20 JOGCW 22 AN5 JOGCCW JOGCW 5 2 1 PUSH ENTER

JOGLED 41 IC405 RESET VOUT 1 8 /RST XIN 2 X401 8MHz XOUT 3 IC404 3

LED-A

JOG

3.4 Vp-p (8 MHz) 05

3-13

3-14

DVP-NS700P

3-8. POWER 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM


IF-83 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-41)

HS13S0U BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-45) D221 T101 D211 L211 Q211 6 7 SW+11V L221 CN201 13 EVER+11V 13

CN401

PS402 Q404, 405

CN404 7 AU+11V

EVER11V

PS401 3

SW11V

POWER 2 (SEE PAGE 3-17)

EVER+3.3V D311 SW101 AC IN 1 2 CN101 F101 L101 LINE FILTER POWER D101 L311 P311 Q311 12 +5V

11 12

5 6

EVER+3.3V AI+5V

CN403 5 SW+11V Q101, 102 SWITCH Q611 8 SW+3.3V 8 IC403 +1.8V REG Q411 +3.3V REG IC411 SHUNT REG D511 L511 3 EVER11V
EVER+3.3V

+5V

6 7

+11V

D611

L611

P611

+3.3V

D413

POWER 2 (SEE PAGE 3-17) 3 +1.8V

11

EVER+3.3V

1 VIN

VOUT 3

3.3V MNT

D621 (ON/STANDBY) PC101 PHOTO COUPLER IC301 SHUNT REG Q621, 622 LED DRIVE

SW11V

F1 Q401, 402, T401 F2 DC/DC CONVERTER ND401 FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

D405

IC405 RESET IC404 IF CON 30 PONCHK 26 PCONT VKK

Q712 POWER CONTROL EVER+3.3V

P-CONT

P-DET

19 PDET

05

D414 BNR

RM-85 BOARD
(SEE PAGE 4-6) SHUTTLE/ CURSOR STICK IC401 REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER D501 PROGRESSIVE CN501 3 CN406 3 CN402 E+3.3V 4 PUSH ENTER

EVER3.3V

3-15

3-16

DVP-NS700P
3-9. POWER 2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

AV-58 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-35 to 4-38)


CN202 AI+5V 6 IC101 5V REG 2 IN Q201 POWER 1 (SEE PAGE 3-16) AU+11V 7 IC103 Q203, 216 SW11V 3 IC203 +5V REG 3 IN D201 EVER+3.3V 5 IC204 OPTICAL DIGITAL OUT DIGITAL OUT OPTICAL MUTE V OUT 1 IC104 VIDEO BUFFER IC201 AUDIO AMP VIDEO SELECTOR OUT 3 IC102 VIDEO BUFFER

CN203 5 CN102 7 3

AU+5V

5V +5V

MB-100 BOARD (SEE PAGE 4-11 to 4-30)


IC901 IC903 +3.3V REG CN902 7 3 4 VIN 5V VOUT 5 IC902 VIDEO ENCODER IC502 +3.3V REG 5 VIN CN801 25 IC802 AUDIO D/A CONVERTER FL101 FILTER IC102 PLL FL102 FILTER IC103 SYSTEM CONTROL IC505 16M SDRAM IC501 +1.8V REG FL505 FILTER FL103 FILTER IC504 16M SDRAM IC801 AUDIO DSP CN101 IC107 FLASH MEMORY IC101 EEPROM IC601 BNR FL105 CN202 5 FL201 FILTER CN201 19 11 FL108 2 VIN VOUT 1 IC503 AV DECODER VOUT 4 GATE ARRAY IC001 I/P CONVERTER IC003 I/P 16M SDRAM IC002 OSC IC004 INVERTER

FL502 FILTER FL501 FILTER

3.3V MNT +3.3V

8 7 FILTER FL106 LED INLIMIT SENSOR

POWER 1 (SEE PAGE 3-16)

+5V

FILTER

VCC MOD

OPTICAL DEVICE

+1.8V

FILTER IC202 IC301 +3.3V REG IC401 FL104 FOCUS/TRACKING COIL DRIVE, SPINDLE/SLED/ LOADING MOTOR DRIVE IC303 16M DRAM 2 VIN VOUT 1 IC302 ARP, SERVO DSP DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO

+11V

FILTER

05

3-17

3-18 E

DVP-NS700P SECTION 4 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS


THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS. (In addition to this, the necessary mote is printed in each block.)
For printed wiring boards: X : indicates a lead wire mounted on the component side. x : indicates a lead wire mounted on the printed side. a : Through hole. b : Pattern from the side which enables seeing. (The other layers patterns are not indicated.) Caution: Pattern face side: (Side A) Parts face side: (Side B) Parts on the pattern face side seen from the pattern face are indicated. Parts on the parts face side seen from the parts face are indicated. For schematic diagram: Caution when replacing chip parts. New parts must be attached after removal of chip. Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor, because it is damaged by the heat. All resistors are in ohms, 1/4 W (Chip resistors : 1/10 W) unless otherwise specified. k : 1000, M : 1000k. All capacitors are in F unless otherwise noted. pF : F 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums. All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B, unless otherwise noted. 2 : nonflammable resistor. 5 : fusible resistor. C : panel designation. f : internal component. C : adjustment for repair. U : B+ Line. V : B Line. Circled numbers refer to waveforms. Voltages are dc between measurement point. Readings are taken with a color-bar signal on DVD reference disc and when playing CD reference disc. Readings are taken with a digital multimeter (DC 10M). Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production tolerances. Note: The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Note: Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice por tant le numro spcifi.

DVP-NS700P

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board name.

4-1

DVP-NS700P
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

BASE UNIT KHM-250AAA/J1RP


26P TRKTRK+ 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 CN201 TRKTRK+ FCSFCS+ N.C CD LD N.C DVD LD LD GND SW MOD VR PD GND E D C G VCC VC GND RF F V A B H 3 2 1 24 25 26 A IPSW(DISKEXT) B C H GND 5 6 7 8 9 10 25 24 23 22 21 20 GND Y GND Y/G GND Cb/R GND(EUROVY) Cr/B GND(RGBSEL) GND MAMUTE ALTLMUTE ALT+ GND(RMUTE) P_GND_2CH P_GND_SPDIF ART+ SPDIF ARTAU+5V Y 9P SPINDLE MOTOR CN202 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 8 SPM+ GND SPMINLIM INLIMIT SENSOR GND LED SPMCb/R 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 INLIM GND Cr/B LED GND(RGBSEL) SLAGND SLBMAMUTE SLB+ ALTSLA+ SLA+ LMUTE ALT+ GND(RMUTE) P_GND_2CH 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 16 15 14 13 12 GND(EUROVY) 9P GND Y/G 4 26 C 3 27 IPSW(DISKEXT) 2 28 V CN801 25P WIDE 1 29 CN203 WIDE 25P CN902 9P DSEL GND -5V Cr GND Cb +5V Y GND 1 9 CN102 DSEL GND -5V Cr GND Cb +5V Y GND 9P 26P

FCSFCS+ N.C CD LD N.C DVD LD LD GND SW

PD GND E D C G

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

FFC(FMAV-003)

OPTICAL DEVICE

VR

15

FFC(FMO-001)

MOD

16

11 12

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

VCC VC GND RF F

MB-100 BOARD

E M
SPM+

AV-58 BOARD

FFC(FMO-002)

FFC(FMA-029)

11

19 18 17 16 15 14

F
SLED MOTOR

SLA-

SLBSLB+

MS-81 BOARD
CN001 M001 LOADING MOTOR 5P LDM+ LDMGND CKSW1 OCSW1 1 2 3 4 5 5 CN402 LDM+ LDMGND CKSW1 OCSW1 5P

P_GND_SPDIF ART+ SPDIF ARTAU+5V

FFC (FMM-035)

4 3 2 1

EVER+3.3V

H RM-85 BOARD
CN501 5P SIRCS GND E3.3V 1 2 3 4 5 5 CN406 SIRCS 15P GND EVER3.3V CN101 MGND +1.8V +3.3V GND GND +5V GND PROG +11V 6P 3.3V_MNT 5P

A_MUTE 2 2 A_MUTE

GND

GND

GND

RXD

TXD

SO0

SC0

SI0

GND PROG

2 1

RF MON

XFRRST

IFBUSY

XIFCS

CN103

FFC (FIR-003)

4 3

+3.3V

HARNESS (AI-60)
10 7 6 5 4 3 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 V_MUTE

10

11

12

13

14

15

7P

EVER+3.3V

XFRRST

AU+11V

XIFCS

XIFBUSY

PCONT

AI+5V

GND

3.3V_MNT

IFRST

GND

SOO

SC0

SIO

HS13S0U BOARD J

B to B
CN201 13P 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 CN401 13P +11(AUDIO) +5V EVER+3.3V D_GND D_GND SW+3.3V SW+11V SW+11V M_GND +11(AUDIO) 10 11 12 13 14 +5V 15P EVER+3.3V D_GND D_GND SW+3.3V SW+11V 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

3.3V_MNT

XFRRST

+3.3V

IFBUSY

XIFCS

+1.8V

SOO

SC0

MGND

GND

+11V

GND

GND

+5V

SIO

CN405

DOWN LOAD(JIG)
CN402 7p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CURRSOR STICK

CN403

B to B

JOG_CW JOG_CCW

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

SW+11V GND M_GND M_GND EVER-11V LED-C P-CONT LED-A P-DET

K
05

CN101 1 2

2P

M_GND EVER-11V

IF-83 BOARD

E+3.3V AN5

AC_IN(L) P-CONT AC_IN(N) P-DET

FRAME
4-3 4-4

CN404

SW-11V

10P

V_MUTE

DIAG(JIG)

7P

SW-11V

AU+11V

CN202

AI+5V

GND

4-2. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS


MS-81 (LOADING), RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: MS-81, RM-85 board; 1,000 series
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

DVP-NS700P

MS-81 BOARD

B
MB-100 BOARD (5/10) CN402 (SEE PAGE 4-19)

CN001

5P LDM+ LDMGND CKSW1 OCSW1 1 2 3 4 5

JL001 JL002 JL005 JL004 JL003

M001 LOADING MOTOR

S001 CHUCK/TRAY DETECT

C
05

5 IC501
REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER IC501 GP1UD28SYK

RM-85 BOARD

CN501

5P SIRCS 1 2 3 4 5

JL501 JL502 JL503 JL504 JL505 0.2 R503 220 GND E3.3V GND PROG R501 100k R502 47 C502 47u 16V C501 0.01u

1.9 3.4 3 D501 SLR-342DCT32 PROGRESSIVE 2 1

B
Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

IF-83 BOARD CN406 (SEE PAGE 4-42)

AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

C
05

RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) MS-81 (LOADING) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

4-6

LOADING/REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER


MS-81/RM-85

4-5

DVP-NS700P
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO) PRINTED WIRING BOARD Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series

MB-100 BOARD (SIDE A) CN101 CN103 CN201 CN202 CN402 CN801 CN902 IC001 IC002 IC004 IC103 IC302 IC503 IC901 C-1 D-1 A-3 A-2 A-1 C-4 B-4 D-5 C-6 C-5 E-2 B-3 C-2 B-5

Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) MS-81 (LOADING) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO


MB-100
4-7 4-8

DVP-NS700P

MB-100 BOARD (SIDE B) IC003 IC101 IC102 IC107 IC202 IC301 IC303 IC401 IC501 IC502 IC504 IC505 IC601 IC801 IC802 IC902 IC903 Q201 Q202 Q901 Q902 Q903 Q904 Q905 Q906 Q907 C-6 D-1 C-3 E-2 B-3 A-3 C-3 A-1 D-1 B-2 C-1 C-2 B-2 D-3 C-4 B-6 A-6 A-4 A-4 B-6 B-6 B-6 A-4 B-4 A-5 A-4

SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO


4-9 4-10

MB-100

DVP-NS700P
MB-100 (RF AMP, SERVO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

10

11

12

13
B+
GND +5V +3.3V RFMON

14

MB-100 BOARD (1/10)


A
NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY
B+
R237 12k
FL201

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

RF+

B
BASE UNIT KHM-240AAA/J1RP OPTICAL DEVICE C201 0.01u

R202 100

C227 0.01u

C228 0.01u

C233 0.001u

C239 0.01u

B+

C222 C225 0.1u 0.1u

C231 C232 0.1u 0.1u

C235 0.1u

2
3.8
C202 0.01u CN201 26P H B 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 B LD GND 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 JL226 JL201 JL227 JL202 JL203 JL204 JL205 JL206 FCS+ CD_LD DVD_LD A E F DVD LD N.C CD LD N.C FOCUS COIL FCS+ FCSTRACKING COIL TRK+ TRKJL225 JL223 JL224 R203 100 JL218 JL230 JL219 JL220 JL221 JL222 E G
4

C244 10u 16V SSCK SSCK SSWD SSWD

3.5 3.4 0.6

3.6 3.6

SSRD

JL213 JL214 JL215 JL216 JL217

H B

3.8
SIGO

3.3
V33

SSRD SSCS SSCS PI PI TE

MB-100 BOARD (2/10)

64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49

4.2 AIN 4.2 AIP

2.6 BYP

DIN

2.4 FNP 2.4 FNN

DIP

VNA

MEV

ATOP

ATON

C
DVD/CD PD IC

A F R245 100 R209 1k C215 4700p

A F RF GND VC VCC G C

1
3.6 3.6 3.5
1

5 3

VPA

TPA

RX

3
RFIP RFIN CP WIN WPP CN A2 B2 C2 D2 D C B A E F SDEN SCLK SWD SRD MON
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

TE FE FE SSCS MIRR SSCK TZC SSWD SSDFCTI SSRD SSDFCTI SS_MON TZC MIRR

C216 4700p

C D C205 2200p C206 2200p C207 2200p C208 2200p D C

C219 560p

D E GND PD VR MOD DVD/CD LD MODULE SW

IC202
DVD/CD RF AMP, DIGITAL SERVO IC202 SP3728AC

TPH FE TE TZIN VCI DFT TZC PI PII BYP2 MIRR

C243 0.1u

16 15 14 13 12 11 10

R212 0 R215 0 R216 0 R219 0

3.6 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.5 2.5

0 3.3 3.3 3.3 0 3.5 1.6 1.6 2.5 1.6 0 0.7 1.9 0 2.6 0.1

FE TE C247 0.1u SSDFCTI TZC PI C248 0.01u C246 0.01u MIRR

4
SVC

TRKTRK+ FCSFCS+ TRKTRK+ FCSFCS+ MB-100 BOARD (5/10)

D4.1/C5 DVDLD D5/C3.6 CDLD

LDSELO

DVDPD

MEVO

CDPD

LDON

MLPF

FCS-

2.5

VNB

VPB

MIN

MP

MB

VC

TRK+ TRK-

R205 100k

SLB+ SLB+ SLASLASLBSLBSLA+

2.5

0.2 0.2

D5/C0

2.5
G H

2.7 3.5 2.3 2.6

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

2.9
C240 150p

R238 2.2M R206 27k

SLA+ SPMSPMSPM+ SPM+ INLIM INLIM MB-100 BOARD (2/10)

R204 22k R201 330 CN202 9P SLA+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 JL229 JL211 JL212 R224 22 R246 3300 DVD_LD INLIM SPMSPM+ C209 10u 16V C218 0.01u C221 10u 16V L202 47uH CD_LD C226 0.01u

C236 0.047u C238 0.047u

JL207 JL208 JL209 JL210 JL228 SLB+ SLBSLALED

SLA+ SLB+ SLBSLAR207 33

SLED MOTOR

R208 33 R210 47k C217 47u 6.3V R220 33 R211 100

R223 33 R225 47k C223 47u 6.3V

C234 0.01u

B+

INLIMIT SENSOR

GND INLIM

Q201 2SB1132-T100-QR DVD LD DRIVE L201 47uH

D4.8/C5 D4.1/C5 D2.1/C0.7

D5/C4.3 D5/ C3.6 D0.6/C2


XLDON R229 100 C224 0.01u MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

Q202 2SB1132-T100-QR CD LD DRIVE

SPINDLE MOTOR

SIGNAL PATH SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE) VIDEO SIGNAL Y/CHROMA PB AUDIO SIGNAL TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV SLED SERVO DVD/CD FOCUS SERVO

SPMSPM+

H
Waveforms
1 IC202 2 (DVD play) 200 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

05

1 IC202 2 (CD play) 200 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

2 IC202 tl (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ns/DIV

2 IC202 tl (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

3 IC202 rs (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

3 IC202 rs (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

4 IC202 ra (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

4 IC202 ra (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

570 mVp-p

550 mVp-p

1.4 Vp-p

1.4 Vp-p

180 mVp-p

860 mVp-p

1.5 Vp-p

1.7 Vp-p

RF AMP, SERVO
MB-100 (1/10)
4-11 4-12

DVP-NS700P
MB-100 (ARP, SERVO DSP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

7
MB-100 BOARD (2/10)
KTEMU0 KTEMU1

10
MB-100 BOARD (3/10)
CDDOUT CDLRCK CDDATA CDBCK

11

12

13

14

15

16
SDI7 SDI6 SDI5

17
SDI7 SDI6 SDI5 SDI4 SDI4 SDI3 SDI3 SDI2 SDI2 SDI1 SDI1 SDI0 SDI0

18

MB-100 BOARD (2/10)


A
B+
+5V R329 0 2
VIN

5
1
VOUT

3.3
C304 100u 6.3V

B+

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY P:PAL DVD PLAY N:NTSC DVD PLAY *:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.

XSRQ

XSHD

SDI7

SDI6

SDI5

SDI4

SDI3

SDI2

SDI1

C337 0.01u MEMD15

MEMD14

MEMD13

MEMD12

MEMD11

MEMD10

MEMD9

3 GND IC301 TK71533ASCL


R305 4700 R306 4700 R307 4700 R308 4700 R309 4700 R310 4700 R311 4700 R312 4700

C332 0.01u

C334 0.01u

C336 0.01u

MEMD8

GND

SDI0

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

C305 0.01u

SDCK

XSAK

SDEF

MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

B+ B+
R368 4700
CL309 CL310 CL311 CL312 CL313 CL314 CL315 CL308 CL316 JL305 JL306 JL307 JL309 JL310 JL311 JL312 JL313 JL314 JL315 JL316 JL317 JL346 JL347 JL329 JL341 JL342 JL348

R318 0

B+
+1.8V

IC301
+3.3V REG

B+

B+
+3.3V R330 0 R320 0 C343 0.01u
1

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

CL307

3.3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

IC303
16M DRAM IC303 VDD I/O0 I/O1 I/O2 I/O3 VDD I/O4 I/O5 I/O6 I/O7 N.C GM71V18160CT-6TR GND I/O15 I/O14 I/O13 I/O12 GND I/O11 I/O10 I/O9 I/O8 N.C
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53


VDD 1.8V

3.3 VDD 3.3V P0/N*/C0 SD7 P0/N*/C0 SD6 P0/N*/C0 SD5 P0/N*/C0

P0/N*/C3.3 SD3 P0/N*/C0 SD2 P0/N*/C3.3 SD1 P0/N*/C0 SD0 3.3 SDEF P3.3/N*/C3.3 XSAK P3.3/N*/C3.3 XSRQ 3.3 XSHD 1.6 SDCK 1.8 VDD 1.8V 1.6 DOUT 1.6

PLCKO

VDD 3.3V

MNT7

MNT6

MNT5

MNT4

MNT3

MNT2

MNT1

MNT0

1.7 1.5 1.6 ADO5 1.7 ADO4 1.5 ADO3 1.7 ADO2 1.6 ADO1 1.6

ADO7

ADO6

ADO0

MD15

MD14

MD13

MD12

MD11

MD10

LRCK

MD9

ESTB

R341 10k

C317 0.01u
156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105

1.6 D0/C0.8

BCLK

DATA

MD8

VSS

VSS

VSS

1.7 RFD 1.8

1.6 1.7

VSS

SD4

R334 10k

3 IC302 <zcb (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV


3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
MEMD15 MEMD14 MEMD13 MEMD12

MEMD0
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52

C315 100p R199 2700 R299 150k C322 0.01u

MEMD1

R337 100

VDDA4 3.3V VSSA3 INP INM FR3 FR2 FR1 Y VDDA3 3.3V VREF BIAS VDDA2 3.3V VSSA2 AOUT IREF VSSD2 VDDD2 3.3V VRT VDDA1 3.3V RFIN2 AIN VSSA1 RFIN1 VRB VSSD1 VDDD1 3.3V ADC0 ADC1 ADC2 VDDA0 3.3V ADC3 ADC4 VSSA0 ADC5 ADC6 ADC7 VDDA0 3.3V VSSD0 VRBA VSSA0 TESTAA VDDA0 3.3V VRTA VSS TESTK0 TESTK1 TESTK2 XDSPRST
GIO11/TMC2 GIO4/PGREF VDDA5 1.8V GIO9/FGREF GIO10/FGIN GIO5/PGIN GIO0/INT2 GIO1/INT3 GIO2/INT4 GIO3/INT5 GIO7/SDO

MD4 MD3 MD2 MD1 MD0 VDD 1.8V XOE XRAS VSS XCAS XMWR VDD 3.3V MA9 MA8 MA7 MA6 MA5 MA4

MEMD3 MEMD2 MEMD1 MEMD0 C339 0.01u

MEMD5 MEMD6 MEMD7

1.3 0.5 2.4 3.3 1.6 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.6 1.3 3.3 1 2.5 3.3 0.6 1 3.3 2.6 3.3
C326 0.01u

VSSA4 VCO R1 R2

VSS MD7 MD6 MD5

R338 22k

R342 33k R349 27k

C319 0.068u C323 0.01u

R350 1200 R351 2200 R352 2200 C327 0.1u

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15

R344 1k R335 2200 C318 0.01u

C324 0.01u R356 1800

F
C306 4700p RF+ C307 0.01u R336 10k

C328 0.01u C325 0.01u

D0.4/C1.6

MA3

R345 10k

1.6

1 2 3 4

IC302
ARP,SERVO DSP IC302 CXD9635R

MA2 MA1 MA0 VSS XWAT HCS XCS HINT XINT VDD 1.8V A7 A6 A5 VSS A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 VDD 3.3V D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 VSS

3.3 3.3 3.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.8 2.6 2.6 0.7 0.7 2 2 2.3 0 3.3 2.2 0.8 0.7 1.7 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.2

N.C N.C WE RAS N.C N.C A0 A1 A2 A3 VDD

N.C LCAS UCAS OE A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 GND

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 1.8 0 3.3

MEMD7 MEMD6 MEMD5 MEMD4

MEMD2 MEMD3

MEMD4

R343 220

11 10

3.3 3 3 3 3.3 3 3 3 3

MEMD11 MEMD10 MEMD9 MEMD8

C340 0.01u MEMA9 MEMA8 MEMA7 MEMA6 MEMA5 MEMA4 MEMA3 MEMA2 MEMA1 MEMA0 MEMA0 MEMA1 MEMA2 MEMA3 C344 0.01u

3.3 3.3

0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 3.3

3.3 3.3 0 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2

MEMA9 MEMA8 MEMA7 MEMA6 MEMA5 MEMA4

1.4 Vp-p 3 IC302 <zcb (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ms/DIV

D1.6/C0.4

MB-100 BOARD (1/10) R313 470 R314 470 R315 470 R316 4700 R317 10k C313 0.033u SVC R321 470 MB-100 BOARD (1/10) SS_MON C346 4700p C309 4700p

C320 0.01u

0.7 3.3 1.7 1.6 1.9 3.3 1.7 2.2 1.7 1.7 0 3.3

CL301 CL302 CL303 CL304 CL305 C341 0.01u XWAIT XSDPCS XARPCS XSDPIT XARPIT

TE FE PI

C347 0.01u C310 4700p C311 4700p C348 0.01u C312 0.1u R319 6800 C351 0.01u C321 0.01u R385 4700

HA7 HA6 HA5

SLE

SPFG MB-100 BOARD (5/10)

HA4 HA3 HA2 HA1 C342 0.01u HA0 MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

Waveforms
1 IC302 <zx, (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 200 ns/DIV

1.7 Vp-p 4 IC302 <zcn (DVD play) 100 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

I
TMS TMS TDIKT TDIKT MB-100 BOARD (3/10) TCK TCK TDOKT TDOKT C349 0.01u

JL318

HD15 HD14 HD13 HD12 HD11 HD10 HD9 HD8

CL317 CL318 CL319

TRST

CL320

MB-100 BOARD (7/10) MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

TRST XRST XARPRST

GIO8/SCK

XARPRST

VDD 1.8V

VDD 3.3V

VDD 1.8V

JITPWM

JL349 JL350 JL351 JL352 JL353

VDD 3.3V

GIO6/SDI

3.3

3.3 3.3

TMS TRST TDIKT TDOKT TCK R301 3300

VSSA5

PWM0

PWM1

PWM2

CLKIN

GIO12

GIO13

MDS0

MDP0

0.7 0.1

PDM0

PDM1

PDM2

PDM3

DFCTI

SIGNAL PATH
XWR XRD VSS

MIRR

LOCK

MCKI

TRST

DFCT

MON

SCKI

TMS

TDO

VSS

VSS

VSS

VSS

TCK

TZC

TDI

VIDEO SIGNAL 1.7 PB


B+

157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208

1.7

2.2

1.8 0.3 3.3 3.3

3.3

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

1.6

1.8

1.6 1.8 1.6

3.3 3.3 0.8 0.9 3.3

1.6 1.6

3.3 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.7

CL306

JL363

JL322

JL320

JL321

JL357 JL358

B+

R328 10k R302 3300

JL326

JL340

JL364

3.3

3.3

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE)


KTEMU0 MB-100 BOARD (2/10) KTEMU1
TDOKT TDIKT TRST

1.4 Vp-p 2 IC302 <zcz (DVD play) 500 mV/DIV 100 ns/DIV

160 mVp-p 4 IC302 <zcn (CD play) 500 mV/DIV 50 ms/DIV

C331 0.01u

C333 0.01u

TMS

C350 0.01u

C335 0.01u

C338 0.01u

TCK

TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV SLED SERVO DVD/CD FOCUS SERVO


XWRH

R384 10

L
33MARP MIRR SPMUTE LMCTL MDSO MDPO SSWD SSCS SSRD SSCK TSD LMP LMM SLDA INLIM SLDB TDRV+ FDRV+ TZC TDRV-

MB-100 BOARD (5/10) 05

MB-100 BOARD (1/10)

MB-100 BOARD (5/10)

MB-100 BOARD (1/10)

MB-100 BOARD (5/10)

SSDFCTI

FDRV-

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

MB-100 BOARD (1/10)

MB-100 BOARD (5/10)

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

XRD

1.4 Vp-p

860 mVp-p

ARP, SERVO DSP


4-13 4-14

MB-100 (2/10)

DVP-NS700P

MB-100 (AV DECODER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series
1 2 3 4 5

See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

8
MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

10

11

12
MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

MB-100 BOARD (3/10)


DREQ1 DREQ0 DACK1 DACK0 XWAIT XAVDIT XWRH HD7 HD6 HD5 HD4 HD3 HD2 HD1 HD0 XRD HA0

XAVDCS3

HA10

HA11

HA12

HA13

HA14

HA15

HA16

HA17

HA18

HA19

HA20

HA21

HA1

HA2

HA3

HA4

HA5

HA6

HA7

HA8

HA9

C524 0.01u R507 100 XRST C504 0.01u JL523 C514 0.01u C516 0.01u C546 0.01u C547 0.01u

C525 0.01u

B+ B+
R517 10k

C523 0.01u

27MAVD

XAVDCS2

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

*:IMPOSSIBLE TO MEASURE THE VOLTAGE AT THE MARKED POINTS.

B+ B+

0.4 0.7 0.7

1.3 1.9 0.3 1.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 1.8 3.3 3.3 3.3

3.3 1.7

2.3

0.7 0.7 2.6 2.6 3.3 2.7 0.5 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.7 2.5 0.5 2.4

2.4 1.8 1.1 1.3

1.9 1.4 3.3 3.3 3.3

1.8

1.8

1.6

JL522

2 2

IC504
B+
16M SDRAM IC504 K4S161622D-TC80T VSS DQ15 DQ14 VSSQ DQ13 DQ12 VCCQ DQ11 DQ10 VSSQ DQ9 DQ8 VCCQ N.C. DQMU CLK CKE N.C. A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS C530 0.01u ADDT0 ADDT1

1.8
VCC DQ0 DQ1 VSSQ DQ2 DQ3 VCCQ DQ4 DQ5 VSSQ DQ6 DQ7 VCCQ DQML WE CAS RAS CS A11(BA) A10/AP A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC

240 239 238 237 236 235 234 233 232 231 230 229 228 227 226 225 224 223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181

N.C.(BUS_CLOCK)

HHCPU_MD

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180

IOVDD_00 HD8 HD9 HD10 HD11 CVS00 HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15 CVD00 ACLK

CLKI TESTI IOVSS_11 SDDQ0 SDDQ15 CVD08 SDDQ1 SDDQ14 IOVDD_11 SDDQ2 SDDQ13 CVS08 SDDQ3 SDDQ12 IOVSS_10 SDDQ4 SDDQ11 SDDQ5 SDDQ10 IOVDD_10 SDDQ6 SDDQ9 SDDQ7 SDDQ8 IOVSS_09 SDDQM0

HD8 HD9 HD10 HD11

R525 10k

ADDT2 ADDT3 ADDT0 ADDT15 C526 0.01u C531 0.01u ADDT4 ADDT5 ADDT1 ADDT14 C545 0.01u ADDT6 ADDT7 ADDT2 ADDT13

HD12 HD13 HD14 HD15 JL507 MB-100 BOARD (7/10) 512FSAVD JL508 ACH12 JL509 JL510 ACH34 ACH56 MB-100 BOARD (8/10) LRCK BCK SPDIF JL511 JL512 JL513 C509 0.01u

60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

1.7 0.7 0.8 2.2 1.8 1.6

D0/C0.8
ACH12 ACH34 ACH56 CVS01 LRCKO BCKO DO CVD01

IOVSS_00

2.1 2.2 2.3 2.1 2.1 1.5 3.3 2.1 2 2.3 1.7 0.1 0.1 1.8 3.1 2.8 3.3 1.6 2.6 3.3 3.3 2.9 3

ADDT3 ADDT12 ADAD11 ADAD10 ADAD0 ADAD1 ADAD2 ADDT6 ADDT9 ADDT7 ADDT8 C536 0.01u ADAD3

0 0 1.6 1.6 0 1.8 1.6 3.3 1.6 1.6 0 1.6

ADDT4 ADDT11 ADDT5 ADDT10

2.1 2.3 3.3 0.1 3.1 2.8 2.6 2.9 1.5 0.1 0.1 0.7 1.2 1.5 3.3

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

1.9 2.3 1.8 1.9 2.1 3.3 1.5 2.1

1.5 2.1 3.3 2.3 2.1

C508 0.01u

3.3 2.2 2.2 1.8 1.6

1.6 3.3

3.3 1.9 1.9

DM_REQ0

DM_REQ1

HAD10

HAD11

HAD12

HAD13

HAD14

HAD15

HAD16

HAD17

HAD18

HAD19

HAD20

HAD21

HAD22

IOVDD_13

IOVDD_14

HAD23

HAD0

HAD1

HAD2

HAD3

HAD4

HAD5

HAD6

HAD7

HAD8

HAD9

IOVDD_12

IOVSS_14

IOVSS_13

DM_ACK0

DM_ACK1

IOVSS_12

HIREQO

HRWB

HWAITOB

AVDD_08

AVDD_07

SCLKIN

CVS10

CVD09

CVD10

CVS09

HCSB

RSTB

CPOT

HD7

HD6

HD5

HD4

HD3

HD2

HD1

HD0

VC

AVDD_06

AVSS_06

2.3 2.1 2.1 2.2 3.3 2.1 1.5 2 1.7 3.3 0.1 1.6 3.3 0.1 0 1.8 2.1 1.8 1.4

ADDT15 ADDT14

ADDT13 ADDT12 C534 0.01u ADDT11 ADDT10

ADDT9 ADDT8

ADAD9 ADAD8 ADAD7 ADAD6 ADAD5 ADAD4

CDDOUT

F
MB-100 BOARD (2/10)

CDDATA

D0/C0.8
CDIN1I IOVDD_01 CDBCKI CDLRKI CDEMPI IOVSS_01 CRPCLKI

CDIN2I

CDBCK CDLRCK R510 10k

GND

IC503
AV DECODER IC503 CXD1933Q

SDDQM1 CVD07 SDWEOB SDCASOB IOVDD_09 SDCLKO IOVSS_08 SDRASOB SDCKEO IOVDD_08 SDCS0B SDCS1B(SDAD13_SDRAM64) SDAD12_SDRAM64(N.C.) IOVSS_07 SDAD11 SDAD9 CVS07 SDAD10 SDAD8 IOVDD_07 SDAD0 SDAD7 CVD06 SDAD1 SDAD6 IOVSS_06 SDAD2 SDAD5 IOVDD_06 SDAD3 SDAD4 CVS06

IC505
C544 0.01u C532 0.01u R533 10 ADDT0 ADDT1

B+
IC505

16M SDRAM K4S161622D-TC80T VSS DQ15 DQ14 VSSQ DQ13 DQ12 VCCQ DQ11 DQ10 VSSQ DQ9 DQ8 VCCQ N.C. DQMU CLK CKE N.C. A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS

FL505

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

B+
+3.3V

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

33MAVD

SDI0 SDI1 SDI2 SDI3 C510 0.01u SDI4 SDI5 MB-100 BOARD (2/10) SDI6 SDI7

D*/C0 DTI0 D*/C3.3 DTI1 D*/C0 DTI2 D*/C3.3


DTI3

VCC DQ0 DQ1 VSSQ DQ2 DQ3 VCCQ DQ4 DQ5 VSSQ DQ6 DQ7 VCCQ DQML WE CAS RAS CS A11(BA) A10/AP A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

CVS02

3.3

ADDT2 ADDT3 C528 0.01u ADDT4 ADDT5 C533 0.01u

SDCK

1.8 1.6 3.3 3.3

CVD02 ICLKI IOVSS_02 IERRI

1.5 0.1 0.1 0 3.3 0.1 1.8 1.8 0.7 2.1 1.2 1.8 3.3 1.5 1.4 3.3 3.3

ADDT6 ADAD11 ADDT7 ADAD9

SDEF XSHD XSAK XSRQ

ADAD10 ADAD8

D*/C3.3 IVALI D*/C3.3


IREQO PWM CVS03 IOVDD_03 DVO0

ISTARTI

ADAD0 ADAD7 C529 0.01u ADAD1 ADAD0 ADAD6 ADAD1 ADAD2 ADAD2 ADAD3 ADAD5 C537 0.01u ADAD11 ADAD10

IC501
+1.8V REG

R519 0 C538 0.01u

3.3
PD0 PD1 PD2

B+

IC501 TK71518ASCL

B+
C539 0.01u

3.3
2 1

1.8
VOUT VIN

PD3

R548 0

D0.8/C1.2 1.2 DVO1 D0.4/C1.1 DVO2 D0.9/C1.3


DVO3 CVD3

1.8
C502 10u 16V PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 R554 10

GND

J
JL544

D1.6/C1.5 D1.1/C1.7 DVO5 D1.1/C0.7 DVO6 D1.7/C1


DVO4 DVO7 IOVSS_03 D1CLKO

2.1 2.3 3.3 0.1 3.1 2.8 2.6 3 1.5 0.1 0.1 0.7 1.2 1.5 3.3

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

D*/C0 DTI4 D*/C0 DTI5 D*/C0 DTI6 D*/C0


DTI7

IOVDD_02

1.5 2.1 3.3 2.3 2.1

3.3 1.9 1.9

2.3 2.1 2.1 2.2 3.3 2.1 1.5 2 1.7 3.3 0.1 1.6 3.3 0.1 0 1.8 2.1 1.8 1.4

ADDT15 ADDT14

ADDT13 ADDT12 C535 0.01u ADDT11 ADDT10

ADDT9 ADDT8

ADAD9 ADAD8 ADAD7 ADAD6 ADAD5 ADAD4

ADAD3 ADAD4

N.C.(PD32FLAG)

MB-100 BOARD (4/10) MB-100 BOARD (9/10)

27MVGA32 PRRESET 27MCLK FL501 JL543 R549 0

1.6

1
IOAVSS_00 AVDD_00 AVSS_00 AVSS_01 ROUT

2
AVDD_01 AVSS_02 BOUT

3
AVDD_02 AVSS_03 DVDD33 DVSS33 GOUT

4
AVDD_03 AVSS_04 YOUT

5
AVDD_04 AVSS_05 COUT

6
IOAVDD_00 COMPOUT IOVDD_04 AVDD_05 VREFI FLDO IREFI VGO

7
X_SCAN_EN SHTDWNB IOVDD_05 NRSDOUT IOVSS_04 IOVSS_05 HSYNCO NRSENB CVD04 CVD05 CVS04 CVS05 PDO0 PDO1 PDO2 PDO3 PDO4 PDO5 PDO6 PDO7 PDI7 PDI6 PDI5 PDI4 PDI3 PDI2 PDI1 PDI0 TDO

TRST TMS

TRST

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

SIGNAL PATH VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO SIGNAL

K
+1.8V

N.C.

B+

JL541

TCK

TDI

CHROMA 0.9 PB

Y/CHROMA

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

0.6 3.3

0.6 3.3

0.6 3.3

3.3

0.5 3.3

0.6 3.3

0.5 3.3

3.3 0.5 0.4 3.3 1.8

1.1 1.1 1.6 1.8

0.4 0.9 0.8

0.7 0.9 0.4 0.9 3.3 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.7

3.3 3.3

1.8

B+
+3.3V MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

JL542 C501 1u 50V

FL502

B+
C506 10u 16V

B+

R518 1200

1.8 3.3 3.3

C519 0.01u C540 0.01u C518 0.1u C541 0.01u C522 0.01u C542 0.01u

R524 10k

GND R521 0 C520 0.01u R522 3300 RV501 1k C521 0.1u

B+
+5V JL536 PD7 PD6 PD5 PD4 MB-100 BOARD (9/10) PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0 JL535 JL534 JL533 JL532 JL531 JL530 JL529 PD7

B+

B+

5
5 4

3.3
VOUT
R511 220

C513 0.01u R512 220 R513 220 R514 220 R515 220 R516 220

JL524 JL525 JL526 JL527

TMS

IC502 MM1385ENLE

PD5 PD4 PD3 PD2 PD1 PD0

+3.3V REG

NOISE

CONT

GND

IC502
C505 10u 16V

VIN

PD6

RV501 C512 220u 4V VIDEO LEVEL ADJ

JL528 TDIKT

MB-100 BOARD (2/10)

1.2

M
05

3 C503 0.01u

PDO0

PDO1

PDO2

PDO3

PDO4

PDO5

PDO6

PDO7

COMPOUT

HSYNC

DATAVGA

CSVGA

YOUT

COUT

CB/R

CR/B

Y/G

FLD

TDOKT TCK

PDI7

PDI6

PDI5

PDI4

PDI3

PDI2

PDI1

MB-100 BOARD (8/10)

MB-100 BOARD (4/10)

AV DECODER
MB-100 (3/10)
4-15 4-16

PDI0

DVP-NS700P

Waveforms
1 IC503 yd 6 IC503 i;

MB-100 (BNR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series

See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

10

MB-100 BOARD (4/10)


NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY
PDO6

C602 0.01u

B+

PDI7 JL603 JL604

620 mVp-p (H) 2 IC503 yh

1.1 Vp-p (H) 7 IC503 ik

VIDEO SIGNAL Y/CHROMA

PDO7

PDI6

SIGNAL PATH

1.7

3.3

1.8

PB 1.1

PDI7 PDI7

1.1
YCOUT6

PDI6 PDI6 PDI5 PDI5 PDI4 PDI4 PDI3 PDI3 PDI2 PDI2 PDI1 PDI1 PDI5 PDI4 PDI3 C601 0.01u PDI2 PDI1 PDI0 PDI0 PDI0 MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
YCOUT7 YCIN_6 YCIN_7 EXPH1 EXPH0 GND VDD

PDO0

PDO0
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25

C
620 mVp-p (H) 3 IC503 yl
MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

PDO1 PDO2 PDO3 PDO4

PDO2 PDO3 PDO4 PDO5 PDO6 PDO7

PDO5 PDO4 PDO3

1.1 1.6 0.9 0.4 0.9 0.7

TMC YCIN_5 YCIN_4 YCIN_3 GND YCIN_2 YCIN_1 YCIN_0

YCOUT5

IC601
BNR IC601 CXD9631Q

YCOUT4 YCOUT3 VDD GND YCOUT2 YCOUT1 YCOUT0

3.2 Vp-p (H)

PDO5 PDO6 PDO7

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 9

PDO1

1.1 1.6 1 3.3 0.4 0.9 0.8

PDO2 PDO1 PDO0

H_SYNC

NRSDIN

MRST

CK27

GND

VDD

SCS

FID

3.3

3 0
HSYNC

1.6 3.3 3.3

1.8

R604 100 XRST CSVGA DATAVGA MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

B+

940 mVp-p (H) 4 IC503 uf

+3.3V MB-100 BOARD (7/10) GND


C603 0.01u C604 0.01u

MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

FLD 27MVGA32

05

940 mVp-p (H)

5 IC503 uj

810 mVp-p (H)

4-17

4-18

MB-100 (4/10)

BNR

DVP-NS700P

MB-100 (DRIVE) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
SIGNAL PATH SPINDLE SERVO(SPEED AND PHASE) TRACKING SERVO DVD/CD CDV SLED SERVO DVD/CD
B+
+3.3V MB-100 BOARD (7/10) +5V GND

15

16

MB-100 BOARD (5/10)


A
NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

B+

R432 10k

FOCUS SERVO

B+
C416 0.01u R427 100k R429 56k R418 33k R406 120k C402 220p C412 0.033u R431 56k C413 0.033u C417 0.001u R430 100k C414 0.01u R433 10k R434 330 SVC SPFG

R402 10k R403 10k

MB-100 BOARD (1/10,2/10) MB-100 BOARD (2/10)

C
MS-81 BOARD CN001 (SEE PAGE 4-6)

CN402

5P OCSW1 CKSW1 GND LDMLDM+ 1 2 3 4 5

JL407 JL406 JL405 JL408 JL409 R436 100

C427 0.001u C428 0.001u

R405 1k R404 1k

OCSW1 CKSW1

B+

LDM+

1.6
48
IN1+

5
44
SVCC

1.6
43
VREF

10.8

LDM-

3.3

3.4

2.8

3.3

1.6
52
GND

5.2
37
DO1+

47
OPIN1+

46
OPIN1-

45
OPOUT1

42
OPIN2+

41
OPIN2-

40
OPOUT2

39
PS

38
PVCC1

R407 120k R419 33k R408 150k R409 150k C408 100p C403 100p R421 33k C407 220p

FCS+
36 1

1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6

DO1IN DO2+ OUT1 DO2IN2+ PGND1 IN2DO3+ OUT2 IN3+

5.4 5.3 5.3


C418 0.01u

FCSTRK+ TRK-

31

IC401
FOCUS/TRACKING COIL DRIVE, SPINDLE/SLED/ LOADING MOTOR DRIVE IC401 FAN8034

32

R422 33k

33

34

35

5.3 5.3

SLA+ SLAMB-100 BOARD (1/10)

DO3-

49

GND

51

GND

R410 56k

SLA+ SLA+
30

1.6
FDRV+ FDRVTDRV+ TDRVSLE SLDA SLDB R424 33k R425 220k R423 33k R411 56k C410 0.001u C409 0.001u

DO4+ IN3DO4OUT3 IN4+ IN4PGND2 OUT4 DO6+ IN5+

5.3 5.3

SLASLB+ SLB+ SLB+ SLBSLBSLBSPMSPMSLA-

10

27

1.6 1.6 1.6

D6.7/C6 DO5-

28

1.6

D4/C4.7

DO5+

29

1.6

11

26

C420 0.1u

12

MUTE12

MUTE34

MUTE5

TSD-M

PVCC2

SGND

OUT5

DO6-

FWD

GND

IN5-

REV

CTL

25

5.3

LDM+

C421 0.1u

13 MB-100 BOARD (2/10) R413 10k C404 1500p

14

15

16

17

18

50

19

20

21

22

23

24

1.3

3.2

3.2

3.3

3.3

3.3

1.7

3.3

10.8

5.3

LDM-

MDSO R420 R414 470k R417 470k 10k C401 0.015u R415 120k MDPO R426 470k

R435 10k C411 4700p R439 0

B+
TSD MB-100 BOARD (2/10) SPMUTE XDRVMUTE

C405 0.1u C406 0.1u R416 680k

R412 270k LMCTL LMP LMM

R428 33k

C415 0.01u

OCSW1 OCSW1 CKSW1 CKSW1

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

J
05

JL410 C419 47u 16V JL411

B+
+11V MB-100 BOARD (7/10) M_GND

MB-100 (5/10)

DRIVE

4-19

4-20

DVP-NS700P

MB-100 (SYSTEM CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)


A
NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY
B+
+3.3V MB-100 BOARD (7/10) GND FL102 FL103

B+

B
HA21 HA20 HA19 HA18
MB-100 BOARD (3/10) XAVDIT XARPIT MB-100 BOARD (2/10) HA0 XSDPIT

HA17

IC107
FLASH MEMORY IC107 HA16

HA0

*1

HA1 HA1 HA2 HA2 HA3 HA3 HA4 HA4 HA5 MB-100 BOARD (2/10,3/10)

SI1

MB-100 BOARD (8/10)

SO1 SC1 HA15

MBM29LV160BE-90TN A16 BYTE VSS DQ15/A-1 DQ7 DQ14 DQ6 DQ13 DQ5 DQ12 DQ4 VCC DQ11 DQ3 DQ10 DQ2 DQ9 DQ1 DQ8 DQ0 OE VSS CE A0

A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A19 N.C. WE RESET N.C. N.C. RY/BY A18 A17 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

SO0

SC0

SI0

IC101
EEPROM C103 0.01u C110 100u 4V

HA14 HA13 C113 0.01u R152 22k C115 0.01u R130 10k HA12 HA11

B+

B+

D
1 2

IC101 BR24C16F-E2 A0 A1 A2 VCC WP SCL

HA10 HA9

R128 3300

R121 10k R146 10k R123 10k R134 10k R148 4700 R151 3300 R153 3300 R155 3300

R106 10k

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 0

HA20

2.4 2.4 0.5 2.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 0.5 1.9 3.3 3.3
R162 10k

1.8 3.3 2.2 1 0.8 0.4 0.7 0.7 1.7 0.7 3.3 1.6 1.3 1.8 1.9 2.2 0.3 2.2 1.3 2.6 2.4 2.3
B+

HA5 HA17 HA6 HA6 HA7 HA7 HA8 HA8 HD15 HD7 HD14 HD6 HD13 HD5 HD12 HD4 C124 0.01u HD11 HD3 HD10 HD2 HD9 HD1 HD0 HD8 HD1 HD0 HD2 HD2 HD3 HD3 HD4 HD4 HD5 HA1 HD6 HD6 HD7 HD7 HD8 HD8 HD9 HD9 HD10 HD5 HD1 HD0 HA9 HA9 HA10 HA10 HA11 HA11 HA12 HA12 HA13 HA13 HA14 HA14 HA15 HA15 HA16 HA16 HA17 HA17 HA18 HA18 HA19 HA19 HA20 HA20 HA21 HA21 MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

JL111

3.3 3.3

3.3 3.3

3.4

3.3 3.3 3.3

2.6 3.1 3.1

3.3 3.3

3.3

1.4 1.9 1.3 1.1

R161 0

1.8
1

30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

GND SDA

E
JL539 SI2 SDA MB-100 BOARD (9/10,10/10) SCL MB-100 BOARD (2/10-4/10,8/10) JL540 SO2

HA19 HA18 HA16 VSS HA15 HA14 HA13 HA12 HA11 HA10 HA9 HA8 VCC HA7

60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31

SI2 SO2 DSENS VSS XRST XARPRST RGBSEL/MICMUTE SDA SCL TRM+/XKRRST EUROV/Y/CLAPSW1 DISCEXT/CLPSW0 MD0 MD1 MD2 DREQ0 DACK0 XDRVMUTE DREQ1 DACK1 XIFCS VSS X1 X0 VCC CKSW1 OCSW1 CS0X CS1X

91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120

R182 100k R114 100k

0.7 3.2

2.4 2.4 0.5 2.5 1.7 1.8 1.8 0.5 2.7 3.3 2.6 2.6 0.7 0.7 2 2 2.3 0 2.2 0.8 0.7 1.7 1.6 1.8 2.2 2.2 1 0.4

HA16

HA8 HA7

HA15 HA14 HA13 HA12 HA11 HA10 HA9 HA8 C116 0.01u HA7 HA6 R160 10k

HA6 HA5 HA4 HA3 HA2

XRST XARPRST R117 1k R118 1k JL825 JL826

MB-100 BOARD (2/10)

RGBSEL/MICMUTE MB-100 BOARD (8/10) IPSW

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3

3.3 1.3 1.1 2.7 2.6 2.6 0.7 0.7 2 2

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

HA21

SI0

SC0

VCC

SO1

SO0

SC1

INT7

INT6

INT5

INT4

INT3

INT2

INT1

INT0

AN3

AN2

AN1

AN0

WP

SI1

HA22

HA21

HA20

HA19

HA18

TRM-/XKRCS

AVSS

AVRH

AVCC

HA17

HD10 HD11 HD11 HD12

DREQ0

G
MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

DACK0 DREQ1 DACK1 XDRVMUTE R119 10k R116 10k

IC103
SYSTEM CONTROL IC103 MB91307APFV-G-BND-E1

HA6 HA5 HA4 HA3 HA2 HA1 HA0 VSS HD15 HD14 HD13

HA5 HA4 HA3 HA2 HA1 HA0 HA19 HA18 HD15 HA8 HD14 HA7 HD13 HA6 HD12 HA5 HD11 HA4 HD10 HA3 HD9 HA2 HD8 HA1 HD7 HD6

IC108
OTP IC108 MSMR27V160

*1

HD12 HD13 HD13 HD14 HD14 HD15 HD15

MB-100 BOARD (2/10,3/10)

H
2
MB-100 BOARD (5/10) X101 16.5MHz

R111

470 R133 10k C109 0.01u R177 10 R178 10

22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

1.6 1.6 3.3 0 3.3 2.4


JL107

HD12 HD11 HD10 HD9 HD8 HD7

CKSW1

VESCS/X39CS

3.3 D3.3/C0

I
MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

OCSW1 XAVDCS2

3.3

BYTE CE VSS VSS D15/A-1 OE D7 D0 D14 D8 D6 D1 D13 D9 D5 D2 D12 D10 D4 D3 VCC D11

CS2X

HD6

XFRRST

OCSW2

XLDON

CPUCK

XDACS

XWAIT

HD0

HD0

HD1

HD2

HD3

HD4

SC0 SO0 SI0 SO2

SC0 SO0 SI0 SO2 SI2

HD5

VSS

HD8 HD1 HD9 HD2 HD10 HD3 HD11 HD5

61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

3.3 3.3 2.5

3.3 3.3

2.6 3.3

3.3 3.3

3.3

1.3 0.3 1.9 1.3 0.7

3.3
B+

3.3
R129 10k

0
R156 10k

0.7

SI2 MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

C112 0.1u

R113 10k

R145 R143 10k 10k C114 0.01u

2.6 1.3 2.2 0.3 2.2 1.9 1.8 1.3 1.6

2.2 1 0.8 0.4 0.7 0.7 1.7 0.7 3.3

R163 10K

1.3 1.1 2.7 2.6 0.7 0.7 0.7 2 2 2.3 2.4

N.C. A19 A18 A8 A17 A9 A7 A10 A6 A11 A5 A12 A4 A13 A3 A14 A2 A15 A1 A16 A0

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44

3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3

HA21

1.4 1.9 0.5 1.8 1.8 1.7 2.5 0.5 2.4 2.4 1.8 3.3

HA21 HA20 HA9 HA10 HA11 HA12 HA13 HA14 HA15 HA16 HA17

HD15 HD7 HD14 HD6 HD13 HD5 HD12 HD4

3.3

CL102

JL109

JL108

JL123

MAMUTE

48/44.1K

BGRNTX

XWRH

XWRL

NMIX

HSTX

WIDE

CS3X

CS4X

CS5X

CS6X

CS7X

BRQ

XRD

Waveform
1 IC103 tf

R112 1k XIFCS MB-100 BOARD (3/10) MB-100 BOARD (2/10) XAVDCS3 XARPCS

HD4 HD3 HD2 HD1 HD0

K
MB-100 BOARD (2/10,3/10) MB-100 BOARD (7/10) MB-100 BOARD (8/10)

XSDPCS XWAIT XRD XWRH TRST XDACS

X39CS/XVESCS FSEL WIDE

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

L
05

MB-100 BOARD (8/10) MB-100 BOARD (1/10) MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

MAMUTE XLDON IFBSY

1.7 Vp-p (16.5 MHz)

SYSTEM CONTROL
4-21 4-22

MB-100 (6/10)

DVP-NS700P
MB-100 (CLOCK GENERATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series

10

11

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)


NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY
B+
FL101 C104 R101 100u 2.2 4V R109 10

FSEL

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

IC102
PLL R135 10 27MAVD MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

B+
IC102 IMIC6001BT-D N.C 33-1OUT FSEL 33-2OUT VDD VSS 512-1OUT 512-2OUT

VDD VSS 27-1OUT 27-2OUT VDD VSS XTI XTO

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

B 1
C106 0.01u

C105 0.01u

4
JL104 1.6 D3.3/C0 JL103 1.6 3.2 R124 10 R125 10 C111 0.01u R126 10 R138 10 R141 R127 10 R142 10 10 512FSAVD 512FS2CH MB-100 BOARD (9/10) R136 10 33MARP R137 10 33MAVD MB-100 BOARD (3/10) MB-100 BOARD (2/10)

CL101 JL102

1.6 1.6 3.2 1.6 1.6

3.2

C107 15p

C108 18p

X102 27MHz

R107 820

1.6 1.6

JL105 JL106

512FS6CH

SC0 SO0

SC0 SO2 SO0 SI2 SI0 SO2 SI2 R170 1k

JL117 JL118 JL119

CN103 6 5 4 3 2 1 TXD RXD GND

6P

SI0 SO2 SI2

B+

B+

JL120 JL134 JL121

DIAG (JIG)

+3.3V GND RF MON

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

RFMON

MB-100 BOARD (1/10)

E
SC0 SO0 SI0 XIFCS IFBSY R164 100 R165 100 R166 470 R167 0 FB109 R168 0 JL126 JL127 JL128 JL129 JL131 JL132 JL133

CN101 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 GND SC0 SO0 SI0 XIFCS IFBUSY

15P

MB-100 BOARD (2/10,3/10,6/10) MB-100 BOARD (1/10-6/10,8/10-10/10)

TRST

XFRRST 3.3V_MNT +3.3V GND +5V GND +1.8V MGND +11V

IF-83 BOARD CN403 (SEE PAGE 4-42)

B+
+3.3V

FB103 FL106

FL105

FB106

JL114

B+
MB-100 BOARD (1/10-3/10,5/10) +5V

FB104

FB107 FL108

B+

B+ B+

JL115 JL116

6 5 4 3 2 1

B+
MB-100 BOARD (2/10,3/10) +1.8V

FB108

FB110

JL130 JL113

B+

FB102 C122 47u 16V C121 100u 6.3V C118 47u 4V

FL104

FB105

B+

JL112

G
05

+11V MB-100 BOARD (5/10) M_GND

MB-100 BOARD (1/10-6/10,8/10-10/10)

C123 220u 4V

GND

Waveforms
1 IC102 3 2 IC102 7 3 IC102 9, 0 4 IC102 qd, qg

3.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)

1.5 Vp-p (27 MHz)

DVD : 3.3 Vp-p (24.57 MHz) CD : 3.3 Vp-p (22.58 MHz)

3.2 Vp-p (33.87 MHz)

CLOCK GENERATOR
MB-100 (7/10)
4-23 4-24

DVP-NS700P

MB-100 (AUDIO DSP, D/A CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series

See page 4-7 for printed wiring board.

10

11

12

MB-100 BOARD (8/10)


NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY SIGNAL PATH
JL803 JL854
C810 0.01u

B+

SPDIF MAMUTE

MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

3.3

B
PB

CHROMA

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

3.3
MODE DSTP XRST

JL807

VIDEO SIGNAL

D0/C0.8
SDO0 BS

IPSW WIDE COMPOUT COUT YOUT Y/G

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37

VSS

VSS

BCKO

VSS

LRCKO

SDOI

VDD

MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

C802 0.01u

3.3 1.6 1.6 0 0 1.6

N.C. VDD MCLK VSS LRCKI SDI0 SDI1 SDI2 BCKI VSS XCS N.C.

B00 B01 B02 B03

CB/R CR/B

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

512FS6CH

LRCK ACH12 MB-100 BOARD (3/10) ACH34 ACH56

D0/C0.8

IC801
AUDIO DSP IC801 CXD9626Q

JL818 JL824 JL823 JL822

CN801 1 2 3 4 WIDE V

25P

B04 B05 B06 B07 VSS VDD B08 B09

IPSW(DISCEXT) C GND Y GND Y/G GND Cb/R GND(EUROVY) Cr/B GND(RGBSEL) GND MAMUTE ALTLMUTE ALT+ GND P_GND_2CH P_GND_SPDIF ART+ SPDIF ARTAU+5V AV-58 BOARD (2/2) CN203 (SEE PAGE 4-37)

12 11 10

R803 0

3.3

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

X39CS/XVESCS

3.3

C811 0.01u

JL821

5 6

JL820

7 8

1/2MCLK/B14

JL819

9 10

VDD

SCK

VSS

VSS

B15

B13

B12

B11

B10

SO

SI

R807 0

JL817

11 12 13

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3.3 3.3

3.3

JL834 JL827 JL832

14 15 16 17 18

B+
+3.3V GND C807 0.01u

JL829

MB-100 BOARD (7/10)

IC802
AUDIO D/A CONVERTER IC802 512FS2CH R804 0 CXD9627N-E2 C812 0.01u

19 JL830 JL831 JL828 20 21 22 23 24 25

MCLK BICK SDTI LRCK PDN CSN CCLK CDTI

DZFL DZFR VDD VSS AOUTL+ AOUTLAOUTR+ AOUTR-

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

R805 100 XRST XDACS MB-100 BOARD (6/10) SC1 SO1 SI1

1.6 1.6 D0/C0.8 1.7 3.3 3.3 3.3 0

D0/C5 5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5


B+
C813 0.22u C816 10u 16V

JL833 JL835

B+

4-26

AUDIO DSP, D/A CONVERTER


4-25

MB-100 (8/10)

DVP-NS700P
MB-100 (GATE ARRAY) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

MB-100 BOARD (9/10)


GRE6 GRE7 GGE0 GGE1 GGE2 GGE3 GGE4 GGE5 GGE6 GGE7 GBE0 IFD

MB-100 BOARD (10/10)

ADCLK

PRRESET

GBE1

GBE2

GBE3

GBE4

GBE5

GBE6

GBE7

BLO0

BLO1

BLO2

BLO3

BLO4

BLO5

BLO6

BLO7

IVD

IHD

NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

CB0

CB1

CB2

CB3

CB4

CB5

CB6

R918 10

R919 10 R920 10 R926 10

R928 10 R930 10 R931 10 R932 10 R933 10

R922 10 R923 10 R924 10 R925 10

C901 47u 6.3V

C907 0.01u

R934 10 R935 10

R917 10

R968 100

R954 10 R956 10 R958 10 R960 10 R962 10 R964 10

CB7
R966 10

R952 10

C915 0.001u C908 0.01u R948 0

C917 0.01u

JL950

JL952

JL954

JL956

JL957

JL958

JL960

JL962

JL964

JL966

JL968

JL970

JL972

JL974

JL976

JL978

JL980

JL982

JL984

JL986

JL988

JL991

JL993

JL994

JL996

JL998

JL050

JL946

JL947

JL052

B+

R969 0

B+

3.1

0.1

0.7 0.7 1.2

2.2 3.2

2.3 3.3 1.2 1.2 0.1

1.2

1.2 1.2 1.2 0.4 1.6 3.2

1.6

3.3

0.7 0.7 1.2 0.9

2.3 0.1

1.1 0.7 0.7 1.3

2.3

0.9

1 1

1 1

B+

3.3
VDD

3.2
RESETB

52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40

108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

ADCLK

GBE0

GBE1

GBE2

GBE3

GBE4

GBE5

GBE6

GBE7

BL00

BL01

BL02

BL03

BL04

BL05

BL06

GRE6

GRE7

GGE0

GGE1

GGE2

GGE3

GGE4

GGE5

GGE6

GGE7

AVDD1

BL07

VDD

VSS

IHD

VSS

VSS

IVD

ALSB

GND

U4

U8

U0

U1

U2

U3

U5

IFD

B+

U6

U7

U9

R973 2200 RV901 470 PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJ

Q901-903 BUFFER Q907 2SC2712-YG-TE85L BUFFER R936 1k

C911 0.01u

144 143 142 141 140 139 138 137 136 135 134 133 132 131 130 129 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112 111 110 109

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

JL915 GRE5 JL916 JL917 JL918 JL919 JL920

D
MB-100 BOARD (10/10)

GRE4 GRE3 GRE2 GRE1 GRE0 CR7

GRE0 VDD CR7 VSS CR6 CR5 CR4 CR3 CR2 CR1 CR0 Y7 VDD VSS DCLK PHSYNC PVSYNC PBLANK Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 VSS Y0 CB7 CB6 CB5 CB4 CB3

BR05 VSS BR06 BR07 GL00 GL01 GL02 GL03 GL04 OVD

BRO5

Y3 BRO6 BRO7 GLO0 GLO1 GLO2 GLO3 GLO4 OVD Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7

R940 R941 R942 R943 R944

10 10

VIDEO ENCODER IC902 ADV7199KS

Q902 2SC2712-YGTE85L

10 10 10

-0.2

JL921

1 1.2 0.7 0.7 1 0.5 3.3 2.3 1 1 1.3 0.7 0.8 1 0.1 1.3 3.3 1.7 3 3.2 0.3 1.3 1.3 1.5 1.3 0.2 1.3 2.2 1 1 1 1.3 0.7

JL055 JL056 JL057 JL058 JL059 JL060

GRE5 GRE4 GRE3 GRE2 GRE1

BR00 BR01 BR02 BR03 BR04

0.1 1.1 0.8 0.7 1.3 1 1 2.3 0.1 1.3 0.2 1.3 1.5 0 0.2
R989 0

BRO0

VDD Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 Y8 Y9 VDD GND

VREF RSET

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

3.1 3.1 0.1 1.3 0.2 1.3 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.3 3.1

R946 0

BRO2 BRO3 BRO4 Y0 Y1 Y2

R937 10 R938 R939 10 10

7 IC902 6 5 4 3
VAA_PLL CLKIN V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 V8 V9

COMP DAC B VAA DAC A AGND DAC C

C916 0.1u

BRO1

1.2 0.5 3.2 0.6 0.5 3.2 3 3.2 0.3

1.6

Q901 2SC2712-YG-TE85L

B+

0.5
C922 0.01u R979 1k

0.6

C927 47p

R985 100

R986 100

0.6

B-

JL061 JL062 JL063 JL064 JL065 JL066 JL067 JL068 JL069 JL070

CR6

JL922 JL923 JL924 JL925 JL926 JL927 JL928 JL929

13 12 11 10

3.2

SDA SCL

C919 470p

R971 100 SDA R972 100 SCL PHSYNC

Q904 2SA1162-YGTE85L 54M FILTER R907 100 R910 100

-0.1 0.6
R987 10k

-0.1 -5
C928 47p C933 47p

CR5 CR4 CR3 CR2 CR1 CR0 Y7

HSYNC VSYNC BLANK/CLKOUT

C912 0.01u

C920 470p

PVSYNC PBLANK

R980 1k

AGND

IC901
GATE ARRAY IC901 CXD9649R

OHD CLK135M VSS VDD GL05 XTST GL06 GL07 TMD2 TMD1 GR00 VSS GR01 GR02 GR03 GR04 GR05 GR06 GR07 VDD RL00

OHD OCLK C910 0.01u GLO5

B+

2 1
B+

-0.2

R913 10k

C934 47p

C935 0.1u

C923 0.01u R981 1k

BR976 300 R977 300 R978 300

R988 1k

C936 0.1u

0.1 0.1 0.7 0.7

1.3

DCLK PHSYNC PVSYNC PBLANK

JL930 JL931 JL932 JL933 JL934 JL935 JL936 JL937 JL938 JL939

JL071

R947 0

1 1

2.2 3.2 1.7

C902 0.01u R901 10 R902 100 R903 100 R904 100 Y6 Y5

1.6 3.3 1.3


JL072 JL073

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

3.1

C929 47p Q905 2SA1162-YGTE85L 54M FILTER

R983 1k

Q903 2SC2712-YGTE85L R908 100

1.3 1.3

GLO6 GLO7 C909 47u 6.3V GRO0

R975 2.2

0.5

R953 10 R955 10 R957 10 R959 10 R961 10 R963 10 R965 10

R951 10

B-

C913 0.01u

C914 0.01u

-0.2
R911 100 R914 10k C930 47p

-5
BB+

CR0

CR1

CR2

CR3

CR4

CR5

CR6

Y2 Y1

JL075 JL076 JL077 JL078 JL079 JL080 JL081

Y0 CB7 CB6 CB5

JL940 JL941 JL942 JL943 JL944 JL945

CB4 CB3

1.3 0.2 1.3 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.3 3.3 0.1

GRO1 GRO2 GRO3 GRO4 GRO5 GRO6 GRO7

CR7

B+

Y4 Y3

JL074

0.1

DCLK

IC903
B+
SCL +5V REG IC903 MM1385ENLE SCL MB-100 BOARD (6/10) SDA SDA

R909 100

Q906 2SA1162-YGTE85L 54M FILTER

-0.2
R912 100 R915 10k C931 47p

0.5

JL082

RLO0

3.2
1
C921 47u 6.3V

-5

D0.8/C1.1

D0.4/C1.1 YCIN2 D0.9/C1.3 YCIN3 D1.6/C1.5 YCIN4 D1.1/C1.7 YCIN5 D1.1/C0.7 YCIN6 D1.7/C1

CLK27M

RESET

YCIN0

YCIN1

YCIN7

RR07

RR06

RR05

RR04

RR03

RR02

RR01

RR00

DSEL

B+

RL07

RL06

RL05

RL04

RL03

RL02

RL01

3.3 3.3

VDD

VDD

SDA

VSS

VSS

VSS

CB2

CB1

CB0

SCL

3.2
BBB-

0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

B+ B+

0.8 1.1

1.2

1.3 0.7 0.7 0.7

0.1 2.3

3.3 3.3

3.3

JL951

JL953

JL955

1.6 2.3

3.3
C903 47u 6.3V

1 1

1.3 0.7 0.8

1
B+
C924 0.01u C926 0.01u CN902 9

B-

B+
9P

GND Y +5V Cb GND Cr -5V GND DSEL AV-58 BOARD (1/2) CN102 (SEE PAGE 4-35)

R929 100

R921 100 R927 100

JL948

JL949

JL975

JL977

JL979

JL981

JL983

JL985

JL987

JL989

JL990

JL992

JL995

JL997

JL999

JL051

JL053

C905 0.001u

JL054

C906 0.01u

8 7 6

CB1

CB2

CB0

J
R916 0 PRRESET MB-100 BOARD (3/10) R905 10 27MCLK

B-

4 3 2 1

B+

+3.3V MB-100 BOARD (7/10) GND

OCLK

BRO7

BRO6

BRO5

BRO4

BRO3

BRO2

BRO1

GRO7

GRO6

GRO5

GRO4

GRO3

GRO2

GRO1

GRO0

SIGNAL PATH
OHD RRO7 RRO6 RRO5 RRO4 RRO3 RRO2 RRO1 RRO0 GRO7 GRO6 GRO5 GRO4 GRO3 GRO2 GRO1 GRO0 OVD BRO7 BRO6 BRO5 BRO4 BRO3 BRO2 BRO1 BRO0 PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 OCLK RLO7 RLO6 RLO5 RLO4 RLO3 RLO2 RLO1 RLO0 GLO7 GLO6 GLO5 GLO4 GLO3 GLO2 GLO1 GLO0

VIDEO SIGNAL

L
PB
05

CHROMA

Y/CHROMA
MB-100 BOARD (3/10)

MB-100 BOARD (10/10)

MB-100 BOARD (10/10)

Waveforms
1 IC902 wg 2 IC902 wj 3 IC902 wk 4 IC902 wl 5 IC902 es 6 IC902 ef 7 IC902 eh

4.2 Vp-p (66 MHz)

3.3 Vp-p (V)

3.2 Vp-p (V)

3.6 Vp-p (H)

760 mVp-p (H)

BRO0

RLO0

GLO7

GLO6

GLO5

GLO4

GLO3

GLO2

GLO1

GLO0

OHD

OVD

C904 47u 6.3V

1.0 Vp-p (H)

750 mVp-p (H)

GATE ARRAY
MB-100 (9/10)
4-27 4-28

B+

C932 47p

R984 1k

DVP-NS700P

MB-100 (I/P CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM See page 4-7 for printed wiring board. Ref. No.: MB-100 board; 2,000 series
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

MB-100 BOARD (10/10)


MB-100 BOARD (9/10)
PRRESET GGE7 GGE6 GGE5 GGE4 GGE3 GGE2 GGE1 GGE0 GRE7 GRE6 GRE5 GRE4 GRE3 GRE2 GRE1 ADCLK IHD IVD IFD GRE0 GBE7 GBE6 GBE5 GBE4 GBE3 GBE2 GBE1 GBE0

R073 0 2 X001 66MHz 3 R072 3900 R043 10k R050 10k C012 0.1u IC002 TC7SHU04FU-TE85R R074 0

B
C010 0.001u C004 47u 6.3V C008 0.1u

R001 10
JL014 JL015

JL011

JL012

C011 0.1u

JL013

IC004
INVERTER IC004 TC7SHU04FU-TE85R
1 5

B+

C006 0.1u
R040 10k

1.2 1.2 1.2

1.2 0.1 1.1 1.1 3.3

2.3

0.9 1.2 0.7 0.7

0.4

1.6 3.3

1.6

2.3

0.9 1.3 0.7 0.7 0.9 1.5

IC002
0 3.3
RR17 VDD

3.3

OSC

208 207 206 205 204 203 202 201 200 199 198 197 196 195 194 193 192 191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176 175 174 173 172 171 170 169 168 167 166 165 164 163 162 161 160 159 158 157
ADCLK STNBY VDD VDD

3.3 RESET 3.2 IVD

IHD

BL15

BL14

BL13

BL12

BL11

BL10

GL17

GL16

GL15

GL14

GL13

GL12

GL11

GL10

IFLD

GND

ICLMP

BL17

BL16

BR17

BR16

BR15

BR14

BR13

BR12

BR11

BR10

GR17

GR16

GR15

GR14

GR13

GR12

GR11

GR10

RL17

RL16

RL15

RL14

RL13

RL12

RL11

RL10

R070 2.2

C018 47u 6.3V

C023 0.01u

C025 0.01u

GND GND CLAMP PLLHD SMC SCS COAST RCLMP GCLMP BCLMP VDD SDA SCL HCS1 V1 SOG1 HCS2 V2 SSOG2 HCS3 V3 SOG3 HCS4 V4 SOG4 GND VDD FLD HSO VSO CSO CBLNK VDO PULSE GND OCLK OFLD OHD OVD ACTIV VDD ANC DLO0 DLO1 DLO2 DLO3 DLO4 DLO5 DLO6 DLO7 GND GND

GND GND RR16 RR15 RR14 RR13 RR12 RR11

D
R009 10k R010 10k

JL004 JL005
4 3

105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156

0 0

R052 0 R075 22 C015 47u 6.3V R069 2.2 C016 0.1u R076 22

52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

E
MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

R002 100 SDA SCL R003 100

C001 0.1u

MD05 MD06 MD07 MD08 MD09

VCC DQ0 DQ1 VSSQ DQ2 DQ3 VCCQ DQ4 DQ5 VSSQ DQ6 DQ7 VCCQ DQML WE CAS RAS CS A11(BA) A10/AP A0 A1 A2 A3 VCC

VSS DQ15 DQ14 VSSQ DQ13 DQ12 VCCQ DQ11 DQ10 VSSQ DQ9 DQ8 VCCQ N.C. DQMU CLK CKE N.C. A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 VSS

26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50

R011 100k R012 100k R013 100k R014 100k R015 100k R016 100k

3.3 3.3 3.3 0 0 0 0 0 0

RR10 DSCLK AGND AVDD GND MD00 MD01 MD02 MD03 MD04

1.6 3.2 1.4 0.3 1.4 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.4 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 3.3 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.2 2.7 1.4 3.1 0 0 1.4 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.3 1.5 1.4 1.5 1.4 1.4 0.1 0.1 0.1
R053 22 R054 22 R055 22 R056 22 R057 22 R058 22 R059 22 R060 22 R061 22 R062 22 R063 22 R064 22 C014 0.1u R065 22 R066 22 R067 22 R068 22 DQ12 DQ13 DQ14 DQ15 DQ6 DQ7 C020 0.1u DQ0 DQ1 DQ2 DQ3 DQ4 DQ5 DQ6 DQ7 DQ8
4

IC003
16M SDRAM IC003 MT48LC1M16A1TG-7S

DQ0 DQ1

R017 100k R018 100k

IC001
I/P CONVERTER IC001 CXD9606Q

MD10 MD11 GND VDD MD12 MD13 MD14 MD15 GND RMWE RMCAS RMRAS RMCS RMDQM MBA0 MA00 MA01 MA02 VDD MA03 MA04 MA05 MA06 MA07 MA08 MA09 MA10 GND GND

0 0

3.2 1.5 0.4 1.5 1.7 3.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.3 3.2 0 2.7 1.4 3.1 0 1.4 0.1 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3.2

0.3 6.5 0.6 0.6 3.2 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 3.2 0 1.6 3.2 0.1 0.1 1.4 1.4 1.5 1.5

1.6

1.6

3.3 1.6

3.3 1.6

DQ15 DQ14

DQ9 DQ10 DQ11

DQ2 DQ3

DQ13 DQ12 C026 0.1u DQ11 DQ10

DQ4 DQ5

G
B+

JL008 JL009 JL010

25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

3.3

DQ9 DQ8 C027 0.1u

H
OCLK OHD OVD

JL001

R006 22 R007 10

1.6 0.2 0 3.3 0.1 1.1 0.8 0.8 1.3 1 1 3.3

A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4

JL002 JL003

A10 A0 A1 A2 A0 A1 A2 A3 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10

R008 10 C002 0.1u

MB-100 BOARD (9/10)

BLO0 BLO1 BLO2 BLO3 BLO4 BLO5 BLO6 BLO7 R004 10

R005 10

PLMOD

BUNRI

TMC2

TMC1

GRO0

GRO1

GRO2

GRO3

GRO4

GRO5

GRO6

GRO7

RRO0

RRO1

RRO2

RRO3

RRO4

RRO5

RRO6

RRO7

BRO0

BRO1

BRO2

BRO3

BRO4

BRO5

BRO6

BRO7

GLO0

GLO1

GLO2

GLO3

GLO4

GLO5

GLO6

GLO7

RLO0

RLO1

RLO2

RLO3

RLO4

RLO5

RLO6

RLO7

GND

GND

GND

VDD

VDD

VDD

SCK

TEB

C021 47u 6.3V C022 0.1u R071 2.2

B+

Waveform
1 IC001 <zvm>

53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104

0.1 1.1 0.8 0.7 1.3

2.3 0.1 1.3 0.2

1.3 1.5 1.3 1.3 1.3

0.1 1.3 0.2 1.3 1.5 3.3

1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3

0.8 0.7 1.3

2.2 0.1

0.7 0.7 3.2

1.3 1.3

K
C003 47u 6.3V C005 0.1u

3.3

1 0 1

1 0

1 1

2.2

0 0

3.3

R046 10k C007 0.1u R021 10k


R023 10 R024 10 R025 10 R026 10 R028 10 R029 10 R030 10 R031 10

R032 10k
R034 10 R035 10 R036 10 R037 10

C009 0.1u
R039 10 R041 10

R042 10k
R044 10 R047 10

R049 C013 10k 0.1u R051 10k R048 10

R022 10

R027 10

R033 10

R038 10

R045 10

L
B+
+3.3V MB-100 BOARD (7/10) GND

R020 0

B+

B+

GRO0

GRO1

GRO2

GRO3

GRO4

GRO5

GRO6

GRO7

RRO0

RRO1

RRO2

RRO3

RRO4

RRO5

RRO6

M
05

RRO7

BRO0

BRO1

BRO2

BRO3

BRO4

BRO5

BRO6

BRO7

GLO0

GLO1

GLO2

GLO3

GLO4

GLO5

GLO6

GLO7

RLO0

RLO1

RLO2

RLO3

RLO4

RLO5

RLO6

RLO7

1.6 Vp-p (66 MHz)

MB-100 BOARD (6/10)

I/P CONVERTER
4-29 4-30

MB-100 (10/10)

DVP-NS700P

Waveforms
1 IC102 ed 5 IC102 ws 9 IC104 qa

2.4 Vp-p (H)

1.3 Vp-p (H)

1.6 Vp-p (H)

2 IC102 ea

6 IC102 w;

1.8 Vp-p (H)

1.3 Vp-p (H)

3 IC102 wl

7 IC104 qg

2.0 Vp-p (H)

2.2 Vp-p (H)

4 IC102 wf

8 IC104 qd

2.0 Vp-p (H)

1.6 Vp-p (H)

4-32

DVP-NS700P
There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT) PRINTED WIRING BOARD Ref. No.: AV-58 board; 1,000 series

AV-58 BOARD

CN102 CN202 CN203 D101 D102 D103 D104 D201 D202 D205 IC101 IC102 IC103 IC104 IC201 IC203 IC204 Q101 Q102 Q103 Q104 Q105 Q106 Q107 Q201 Q202 Q203 Q204 Q205 Q207 Q208 Q211 Q216

C-10 B-2 C-11 A-9 A-9 A-8 A-8 B-12 B-11 A-2 B-4 B-9 B-7 B-5 B-10 C-13 A-12 C-9 C-9 C-9 C-10 C-10 B-8 B-8 B-1 C-11 A-2 C-12 B-11 B-10 B-10 B-13 B-2

Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) MS-81 (LOADING) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

AUDIO/VIDEO OUT
4-33 4-34

AV-58

DVP-NS700P

AV-58 (VIDEO BUFFER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM See page 4-33 for printed wiring board, and see page 4-32 for waveforms. Ref. No.: AV-58 board; 1,000 series
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

AV-58 BOARD (1/2)


NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY
BB+ B+ BVMUTE

1L L101 100uH

B+

2L P_GND 1R

IC102
VIDEO BUFFER IC102 C109 0.047u LA73050-TLM NC NC +5V VIDEO_OUT GND C_OUT NC Y_OUT -5V -5V NC +5V(NC) Y_OUT

B2R 7 R129 10k RGND 9 1R 8 2L 4 LGND 6 R130 68 C112 0.1u R131 68 1L 5 JL116 2V 1 VGND 3 JL117 1V 2 J101

2R

R AUDIO 2 L

R AUDIO 1 L LINE OUT

NC NC VIDEO_IN DCCNT1 GND C_IN MUTE1 Y_IN NC(DCCNT2) NC(GND) NC Y_IN(NC) DCCNT2 GND Cb_IN MUTE2 Cr_IN -5V

V C110 47u 16V C

0.5 0.6 0.6 3.3 0.5 1.2

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36

1
4.9 0.5 0 0.5 -5 -5 4.9 0.6 0.1 0.1 -5

VIDEO 2

VIDEO 1

J103 R169 68 R171 0 R139 0 D101 HZM6.8ZWA1TL D102 HZM6.8ZWA1TL 1C 5 1CGND 7 JL119 2C 1 2CGND 3

C
AV-58 BOARD (2/2)

B+

18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

B-

R133 68

Y/G C111 47u 16V CB/R

0.6 1.2 0.6 3.3 0.6 -5

GND Cb_OUT NC Cr_OUT -5V

GND 9 S VIDEO OUT

Y G

CR/B

4.9
Q105 UN2111-TX SIDE SWITCH

6
BR121 3300

R134 68 R170 68

D103 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

D104 HZM6.8ZWA1TL R140 0 R172 0

2YGND 4 JL120 2Y 2 1YGND 8 1Y 6 S 10

4.9
WIDE

0
Q104 UN2213-TX SIDE SWITCH R163 200 R164 200 C126 47u 16V C114 0.1u C113 47u 16V

IPSW D_GND R162 0

B+
AI+5V

B+ B-

R165 200

BSW-11V R160 0

R166 220 R167 220

R168 220

BR104 1k

0.6 -0.1 -5
R101 10k Q101 2SA1162-YG-TE85L BUFFER R105 1k R111 0

IC103
VIDEO SELECTOR C107 47u 16V

R156 0

IC104
VIDEO BUFFER

B+

IC103

TC74HC4053AF(EL)

G
B+
CN102 9P GND Y +5V MB-100 BOARD (9/10) CN902 (SEE PAGE 4-28) Cb GND Cr -5V GND DSEL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 R103 10k R102 10k

16

1.1 0.5
Q102 2SA1162-YG-TE85L BUFFER

1Y 0Y 1Z Z_COM 0Z INH VEE GND

VCC Y_COM X_COM 1X 0X A B C

Y IN NFB1 MUTE1 Cb IN NFB2 -5V Cr IN NFB3

+5V Y OUT GND Cb OUT DR CTL Cr OUT MUTE2 -5V

16

1.1 0.1

R154 22k

IC104

LA7104M-TLM

-0.1

5 -0.3

7
R126 75 R127 75 JL122 Y 4 GND2 5 JL123 PB/B-Y 3 J102 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

15

B-

14

B+

12

12

R106 1k

R113 0

13

13

1.1 0

0.6 0.3 5 5 5

R114 0

-0.1
B+

14

-5

R112 0

1.1

0.6

C108 47u 16V

3.4

15

-0.3

R128 75

GND1 2 JL124 PR/R-Y 1

1.1 0.5
Q103 2SA1162-YG-TE85L BUFFER

Cb

Cr

10

10

-5

B-

R109 R107 10k 10k R108 10k

-5

C115 47u 16V

11

11

-5 -0.1
B-

-0 3.4 -5

B-

R135 47k

R141 47k

R153 47k

9
B-

R155 0

IC101
-5V REG IC101 L79M05TLL-SONY-TL C103 0.01u C104 47u 16V C105 0.01u

R115 3300

BC118 0.01u C119 47u 16V Q107 UN2213-TX I/P SWITCH

3.3 5
C106 47u 16V Q106 UN2113-TX I/P SWITCH

C120 0.01u C121 47u 16V R157 1k R158 1k R159 1k

GND

OUT

IN

0 5.1

S101 SELECTABLE

-10.5

-5

BB-

B+

B+ B-

B+ B-

INTERLACE PROGRESSIVE

SCAN SELECT

C101 C102 0.01u 47u 16V

SIGNAL PATH

K
05

VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA PB Y Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

VIDEO BUFFER
AV-58 (1/2)
4-35 4-36

DVP-NS700P

AV-58 (AUDIO AMP) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: AV-58 board; 1,000 series
1 2 3

See page 4-33 for printed wiring board.

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

AV-58 BOARD (2/2)


NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY D:DVD PLAY C:CD PLAY

R201 4700 C201 560p

R210 2200 R212 5600 C206 180p R208 2200

C207 0.01u

C210 47u 16V

R226 470 R229 47k

R202 4700

R205 5600

C203 180p

1.4

1.4
5 BA4558F-E2

0
6 7 8

10.9 0
Q207 2SD1938(F)T(TX).SO MUTE R235 4700 R238 100k

B-

IC201
AUDIO AMP

D0.8/ C-8.6
R240 470

IC201

VMUTE

C
AV-58 BOARD (1/2)

CR/B CB/R Y/G Y C IPSW V WIDE R203 4700 R206 5600 C204 180p

0 0
B-

D0.8/ C-8.6

R234 4700

1L R241 470 2L R242 470 1R R243 470 2R AV-58 BOARD (1/2)

-8.6

C205 180p R207 2200

C211 47u 16V

Q208 2SD1938(F)T(TX).SO MUTE R227 470

1.4

1.4

C208 0.01u R209 2200 R211 5600

R230 47k

D
CN203

D_GND

R204 4700

C202 560p

P_GND 25P WIDE V IPSW(DISKEXT) C 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 JL209 JL214 JL211 JL216 JL213 JL212 JL215 JL205 JL210 JL207 D201 DAN202K-T-146 R213 4700 Q202 UN2213-TX R279 0 JL237 JL235 JL230 JL206 JL236 JL231 JL232 JL233 R222 10k C209 1u 50V R224 10k

10.2

Q205 2SB709A-QRS-TX

D10.2/C-8.6

D9.5/C10.2
R228 10k

GND Y GND Y/G GND Cb/R GND(EUROVY) MB-100 BOARD (8/10)

D0/C10.2 D6.2/C0
JL234 D202 DAP202K-T-146 Q204 DTC124TKA-T146

Q202,204,205 MUTE DRIVE

BSW-11V

D0.6/ C3.1

D6.2/ C0

R225 47k

B+
AI+5V

AV-58 BOARD (1/2)

CN801 (SEE PAGE 4-26)

Cr/B GND(RGBSEL) GND MAMUTE ALTLMUTE ALT+ GND(RMUTE) P_GND_2CH

B+
JL221 JL222

CN202 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

7P

AU+11V AI+5V EVER+3.3V GND SW-11V A_MUTE V_MUTE IF-83 BOARD CN404 (SEE PAGE 4-42)

B+ B-

JL223 JL224 JL225 JL226 JL228 Q201 2SB710-RTX B+ SWITCH

P_GND_SPDIF ART+ SPDIF ARTAU+5V

B+
B+

B+

11

B+
D_GND AV-58 BOARD (1/2,2/2) C242 330u 6.3V

B+
R253 1k

IC203
+5V REG IC203 NJM78L05UA-TE1

B+

10.9 10.2 -9.2

R217 10k

5
Q211 2SC2712-YG-TE85L BUFFER

2.5 1.8
C229 R256 1k 47u 16V

R216 5600 R218 100k R219 220k

Q203 2SC2712YG-TE85L GND OUT

R249 220

R251 68

IC204 I
DIGITAL OUT D IN OPTICAL VCC GND 1 J201 COAXIAL OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT JL201 C228 47u 16V

IN

R254 1k

-8.7
B-

-9.3
D205 1SS355TE-17

-10.5 -9.3

Q216 2SB709A-QRS-TX

5
B+

10.9
Q203,216 B- SWITCH

-10
B+
R221 10k C244 47u 16V

R220 470

R252 10k

0 5
2 3

JL202 JL203 JL204 C227 47u 16V

SIGNAL PATH
B+
C222 0.01u C223 0.01u C224 47u 16V C231 220u 16V

VIDEO SIGNAL CHROMA PB Y Y/CHROMA

AUDIO SIGNAL

J
EXCEPT AEP,UK,RUS 05

IC204 GP1FA550TZ

AUDIO AMP
4-37 4-38

AV-58 (2/2)

DVP-NS700P

IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL) PRINTED WIRING BOARD Ref. No.: IF-83 board; 1,000 series

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

IF-83 BOARD CN401 CN402 CN403 CN405 CN406 D403 D404 D405 D406 D408 D409 D412 D414 D415 IC403 IC404 IC405 Q401 Q402 Q404 Q405 C-13 E-2 E-3 E-2 E-13 E-11 E-11 E-11 E-11 E-2 E-2 E-11 E-13 E-12 B-11 D-9 C-9 E-12 E-12 C-13 C-12

Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) MS-81 (LOADING) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

INTERFACE CONTROL
IF-83
4-39 4-40

DVP-NS700P

IF-83 (IF CON) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: IF-83 board; 1,000 series

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

IF-83 BOARD
NO MARK:DVD/CD PLAY
CN401 13P JL407 P-DET P-CONT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 JL415 JL416 JL414 PS401 1.0A JL408 JL409

B+ B-

-10.6

B
HS13S0U BOARD CN201 :US,CND (SEE PAGE 4-46)

EVER-11V M_GND M_GND SW+11V SW+11V SW+3.3V D_GND D_GND EVER+3.3V

-10.5
Q404 2SD1766-T100-QR B- SWITCH

B+

-9.8
R415 1800

C407 0.01u

B+
B+
C409 0.01u C411 100u 16V C412 0.01u C414 0.01u C429 100u 16V

B-

B-

B+
JL458 JL460 JL461 JL462 C416 0.01u CN404 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7P AU+11V AI+5V EVER+3.3V GND SW-11V A_MUTE V_MUTE AV-58 BOARD (2/2) CN202 (SEE PAGE 4-38)

3.4

B+
JL410 JL411 JL412 JL413 PS402 1.0A

R418 10k

R416 1800

3.2
Q405 UN2111-TX SWITCH C401 0.01u

B+

B+

B-

JL459 JL463

+5V +11(AUDIO)

B+

B+

R425 100 R481 100 R482 100 R483 100 R484 100 R485 100 R474 100

B+

JL438

R433 10k R421 2700

B+
FB401

JL456 JL455 JL436 JL457

CN403 1 2 3 4 5

15P

+11V MGND +1.8V GND +5V GND +3.3V 3.3V_MNT XFRRST IFBUSY XIFCS SIO SOO SC0 GND MB-100 BOARD (7/10) CN101 (SEE PAGE 4-24)

S401

S404 SURROUND C437 0.01u

IC403
+1.8V REG IC403 BA18BC0FP-E2

B+ B+ B+

JL454

BNR R423 22k S405 R422 8200 S407 R427 3900 S409 R430 2700 S406

B+
R434 10k BNR D414 SLR-342DCT32 (AMBER)

R486 220
DIG10 DIG11 DIG12 DIG1 DIG2 DIG3 DIG4 DIG5 DIG6 DIG7 DIG8 DIG9

JL453

6 7 8

SEG18

9
VOUT GND VIN

10 11 12

Waveforms
1 IC404 3

3.4 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.2 -25.3 -25.3 -25.3 -25.3

S402 TITLE

3
RETURN DVD MENU DISPLAY R435 10k

-24.9

3.4

1.8

13 14

80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 15
BNR DIG1 DIG2 DIG3 DIG4 DIG5 DIG6 DIG7 DIG8 SEG18 DIG9 VCC DIG10 DIG11 DIG12 MULT

R428 8200

R431 3900 S410

R414 2700 S412

1
1

C423 0.1u

C426 22u 16V JL445 JL446 JL447 JL448 JL449 JL450 JL451

R437 120

X401 8MHz

R448 10k C427 0.01u R455 10k

1.3 1.5 0 3.4 0 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.4


R450 10k

VSS XIN XOUT TEST VDD SEL2 /FRRST /RST /STOP SELF_CHECK IR N.C AN9 /CS SI SO /SC AN8 PDET JOGCW BUZ JOGCCW /AMUTE /VMUTE

SEG17 SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

B+

CN405 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

10P

S403

S408

R444 100

24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10

IC404
IF CON IC404 TMP86CK74F-3CB8

SEG8 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 N.C N.C VES N.C N.C N.C JOG LED

H
R420 100 C428 0.01u

3 0 3.2 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 3.2 3.3


R440 10k

-27.5 -27.5 -14.4 -17.1 -27.5 -22.3 -24.9 -19.7 -24.9 -17.1 -24.9 -14.4 -19.7 -27.5 -22.3 -24.9 -12

3.3V_MNT XFRRST XIFBUSY XIFCS SIO SOO SC0 GND IFRST PCONT 5P DOWNLOAD (JIG)

SEG17 SEG16 SEG15 SEG14 SEG13 SEG12 SEG11 SEG10 SEG9 SEG8 SEG7 SEG6 SEG5 SEG4 SEG3 SEG2 SEG1 D415 SLR-342DCT32 SURROUND

JL402 JL403

8 9 10

JL464 JL465 JL466 JL467 JL468

CN406 1 2 3 4 5

PROG GND EVER3.3V GND SIRCS RM-85 BOARD CN501 (SEE PAGE 4-6)

3.4 Vp-p (8 MHz)

2 ND401 1, 2

-0.2
ND401 FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE

R487 220

(AMBER)

D409 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

I
R494 10k R401 4700 S411

0
G10 G11 G12 P18 P17 P16 P15 P14 P13 P12 P11 P10 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 P9 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 F1 F1 F2 F2

DISPLAY

CURSOR

PONCHK

BNRKEY

STATUS

PCONT

BUSY

3.4

AVSS

AN11

PLAY

VREF

SEL0

SEL1

DIG10

DIG11

SEG18

SEG17

SEG16

SEG15

SEG14

SEG13

SEG12

SEG11

SEG10

R449 10k

SEG9

SEG8

SEG7

SEG6

SEG5

SEG4

SEG3

SEG2

3.4 3.4

3.4 3.4

D408 HZM6.8ZWA1TL

3.4 3.4

3.4

3.3
C438 0.01u C439 0.01u

2.6

-27.7
0.01u

R473 10k R470 10k C420 0.01u

CN402

7P JOG_CW JOG_CCW GND 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

C432

JL469 JL470 JL401 JL405 JL406 JL417 JL418 R495 10k

2
8 Vp-p (200 kHz) 3 T401 3
B-

PUSH ENTER

E+3.3V AN5 LED-C

R424 33

IC405
RESET
VOUT GND VCC

CURSOR STICK

LED-A

B+
R402 100k

IC405 S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2

R446 100k C430 R429 C419 220u 25V 390p 5600 L401 47uH

3.4

B+

B+

3.4
C421 0.001u

-10.8
B-

-10.5

C417 4700p

D406 MA113-(TX) 9 1 D404 MA113-(TX) 6 7 D403 MA113-(TX)

2 3

C422 0.1u

C425 22u 50V R490 22k

D412 MA8062-L-TX

Q401 2SC5053T100Q

3
T401 DC/DC CONVERTER

D405 MA113-(TX) R460 0

-0.2

SEG1

3.4

BZ401 (BUZZER)

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

DIG12

B+
DIG1 DIG2 DIG3 DIG4 DIG5 DIG6 DIG7 DIG8 DIG9

VKK

AN6

O/C

10 11 12 13 14 15 16

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58

61 62

C431 0.1u

-10.6
Q401,402 DC/DC CONVERTER

-0.2
Q402 2SC5053T100Q R413 5600 4

20 Vp-p (409 kHz)

M
C436 390p 05

IF CON
4-41 4-42

IF-83

DVP-NS700P

HS13S0U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) PRINTED WIRING BOARD Ref. No.: HS13S0U board; 5,000 series

There are a few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

HS13S0U BOARD
HS13S0U BOARD CN101 CN201 D101 D104 D105 D211 D212 D221 D311 D413 D511 D611 D621 IC301 IC411 Q101 Q102 Q211 Q311 Q411 Q611 Q621 Q622 Q712 B-3 A-1 A-3 A-2 A-2 B-2 A-1 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 A-2 B-1 B-2 A-1 A-3 A-2 B-1 A-1 A-2 A-1 B-1 B-1 A-1

B
A

K A SW101 POWER 1-468-583(ON/STANDBY)

Power Block (HS13S0U) (SWITCHING REGULATOR)

AV-58 (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)

11

05

RM-85 (REMOTE COMMANDER RECEIVER) MS-81 (LOADING) IF-83 (INTERFACE CONTROL)

MB-100 (SIGNAL PROCESS, SERVO)

SWITCHING REGULATOR
HS13S0U
4-43 4-44

DVP-NS700P

HS13S0U (SWITCHING REGULATOR) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM Ref. No.: HS13S0U board; 5,000 series

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

1
HS13S0U BOARD
NO MARK: E-E MODE

3
T101 D211 D2S4M

4
B+ L211 39uH

5
Q211 2SJ525 B+ SWITCH 11 11 S R212 10k

7
B+

A
R105 270k 1/2W

C211 150uF 35V

C213 47uF 35V

R211 1.5k

B+ D221 D1NS4 C221 100uF 35V D311 D1NS4


+

B+ L221 100uH C223 47uF 35V L311 39uH


+

R313 330

R613 270 1/2W

R213 1k 1 2 B
+

CN201 13P P-DET P-CONT EVER11V M_GND M_GND SW+11V SW+11V SW+3.3V D_GND D_GND EVER+3.3V +5V +11 (AUDIO) IF-83 BOARD CN401 (SEE PAGE 4-41)

+ C110 120uF 200V

R106 270k 1/2W B+

5.9 P311 1A 60V 5.2 5.1 Q311 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH

R314 10k

B+ 4.2 R614 10k 3.4 Q611 2SD1768S B+ SWITCH

C314 22uF 50V

3 4 5 B+

L150 120/160

168.7 Q101 2SK2750 SWITCH 2.4 S 2.4

C116 0.01uF 50V

D611 D1NS4 R116 220

B+

L611 39uH

B+ R621 220

P611 1A 60V 3.5

R311 1k

B+ B+

6 7 8 9

C150 470pF 1kV R115 33k C117 0.0033uF 50V

Q102 2SC3377 SWITCH 0.2

D104 HZS2C3-TE R110 1k

R113 680 C311 + 330uF 35V


+ C611 330uF 35V

D413 D1N60

5.2 3.4 Q411 2SD1768S +3.3V REG 4

B+

B+ 3.6 Q621 2SC1740S 0 B+ R623 10k Q622 DTC143ES R622 120 D621 SPR-325MVW 3.4 0 R711 1.8k 2.6 B+

10 11 12 13

R411 470

R412 680

C115 0.033uF 50V

C613 47uF 35V

C313 47uF 35V

4 IC411 AN1431T

C414 0.01uF 50V 2.5 R413 1.8k

C413 47uF 35V

0.7

C
IC411
SHUNT REG D105 1SS270A D212 RD33FB2

Q712 DTC143ES POWER C711 + CONTROL 47uF 35V

Q621, 622 LED DRIVE

D621 (ON/STANDBY)

C511 100uF 35V CN101 2P SW101 F101 2A 125V POWER R114 270 D511 D1NS4

C513 47uF 35V

D
AC IN

L511 100uH

1 C101 0.1uF 250V 2 L101 18mH D101 S1WBA60 8.2 R303 1k 0.2 4.1 R304 680
+ C301 2.2uF 50V

PC101 PS2501

5.1

R301 68

R531 1k

IC301
SHUNT REG C107 2200pF 250V IC301 AN1431T 4.1 2.5

R533 47k R306 1.5k

B+

05

FG201

SWITCHING REGULATOR
4-45 4-46 E

HS13S0U

5-1. SYSTEM CONTROL PIN FUNCTION (MB-100 BOARD IC103)


Pin No. Pin name I/O Function

Pin No.

Pin name

I/O

Function

1-5 39 SCL O I2C bus serial clock output O O I I I I O O I O O O I I I CS0X CS1X CS2X CS3X 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 CS4X CS5X C CS6X CS7X XWAIT BGRNTX BRQ XRD O O O O O I O TRM+/XKRRST EUROV/Y/CLAPSW1 DISCEXT/CLPSW0 MD0 MD1 MD2 DREQ0 DACK0 XDRVMUTE DREQ1 DACK1 XIFCS VSS X1 X0 VCC CKSW1 OCSW1 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

HA17-HA21

Address bus A17-A21

6 7

HA22 WP

Not used Write control signal output to EEPROM

8 9

TRM/XKRCS AVCC

Not used Power supply

10 11

AVRH AVSS

Reference power supply (+3.3 V) Ground

Not used EURO V/Y select signal output/Mute signal output to video buffer Line input select signal output (DISC: H, EXT: L) Input of mode select 0 (fixed at H) Input of mode select 1 (fixed at L) Input of mode select 2 (fixed at L) Input of DMA-REQ 0 from AV DEC Output of DMA-ACK 0 to AV DEC Drive mute signal output Input of DMA-REQ 1 from AV DEC Output of DMA-ACK 1 to AV DEC Chip select signal to IF CON Ground Clock output (16.5 MHz) Clock input (16.5 MHz) Power supply Chuck sensor input Tray sensor input External ROM chip select signal output Not used Chip select signal output (for AV DEC) Chip select signal output (for AV DEC) Chip select signal output (for ARP) Chip select signal output (for servo DSP) Capacitor (0.1uF) connect between ground Not used Not used Wait signal input Test terminal (fixed at H) Test terminal Read enable signal output

12 13

AN0 AN1

I I

Set of mode 0 Set of mode 1

14 15

AN2 AN3

I I

Set of mode 2 Input of interrupt from S101 (AV-58)

16 17

INT0 INT1

I I

Input of interrupt from AV DEC Input of interrupt from ARP

18 19

INT2 INT3

I -

Input of interrupt from servo DSP Not used

SECTION 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

5-1

20 21

INT4 INT5

I -

Input of interrupt from IF CON Not used

22 23

INT6 INT7

Not used Not used

24 25

VCC SI0

Power supply Serial data input from IF CON

26 27

SO0 SC0

O O

Serial data output to IF CON Serial clock output to IF CON

28 29

SI1 SO1

I O

Serial bus 1 (for data input) Serial bus 1 (for data output)

30 31

SC1 SI2

O I

Serial clock output Serial bus 2 (for data input)

32 33

SO2 DSENS

O -

Serial bus 2 (for data output) Not used

34 35

VSS XRST

Ground System reset signal output

36 37

XARPRST RGBSEL/MICMUTE

O O

Reset signal output for ARP RGB signal select signal output/Mic mute signal output

DVP-NS700P

38

SDA

I/O

I2C bus seria data input/output

Pin No.

Pin name

I/O

Function

71

XWRH

High byte write enable signal output (16 bit and 8 bit)

72 73

XWRL NMIX

Not used Not used (fixed at H)

74 75

HSTX VSS

Not used (fixed at H) Ground

76 77

XFRRST CPUCK

I O

Reset signal input from IF CON CPU clock signal output

78 79

OCSW2 XDACS

Not used Chip select signal output to DAC (2ch, 6ch)

80 81

VESCS/X39CS 48/44.1K

O O

Chip select signal output to DSP PLL FS control signal output

82 83

WIDE MAMUTE

O O

WIDE select signal output Audio mute signal output

84 85-92

XLDON HD0-HD7

O I/O

LD control signal output Data bus D0-D7 (16 bit only)

93-100 101

HD8-HD15 VSS

I/O -

Data bus D8-D15 (16 bit) , D0-D7 (8 bit) Ground

5-2 E

102-109 110

HA0-HA7 VCC

O -

Address bus A00-A07 Power supply

111-118 119

HA8-HA15 VSS

O -

Address bus A08-A15 Ground

120

HA16

Address bus A16

DVP-NS700P SECTION 6 TEST MODE


6-1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION 6-3. SYSCON DIAGNOSIS

The Test Mode allows you to make diagnosis and adjustment easily using the remote commander and monitor TV. The instructions, diagnostic results, etc. are given on the on-screen display (OSD).

The same contents as board detail check by serial interface can be checked from the remote commander. On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [0] key on the remote commander, and the following check menu will be displayed.
### Syscon Diagnosis ### Check Menu Quit All Version Peripheral Servo Supply AV Decoder Video Audio Progre Device

6-2.

STARTING TEST MODE


0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. _

Press the [TITLE], [CLEAR], [POWER] keys on the remote commander in this order with the power of main unit in OFF status, and the Test Mode starts, then DIAG START will be displayed on the fluorescent display tube and the menu shown below will be displayed on the TV screen. At the bottom of menu screen, the model name and revision number are displayed. Last Off at the lower right of screen indicates the information code concerning the last power off. To execute each function, select the desired menu and press its number on the remote commander. To exit from the Test Mode, press the [POWER] key.
Test Mode Menu 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Syscon Diagnosis Drive Auto Adjustment Drive Manual Operation Mecha Aging Emergency History Version Information Video Level Adjustment Exit: POWER Key

0. Quit
Quit the Syscon Diagnosis and return to the Test Mode Menu.

1. All
All items continuous check This menu checks all diagnostic items continuously. Normally, all items are checked successively one after another automatically unless an error is found, but at a certain item that requires judgment through a visual check to the result, the following screen is displayed for the key entry.
### Syscon Diagnosis ###

_ Model : DPX-1430xx Revision : 1.xxxx Last Off: xx

Power Off Information Code List 00 : 01 : 02 : Primary Power Off Power Off Request from SYSTEM CONTROL Power Off by Emergency Power Off Command from SYSTEM CONTROL (if information is sent from SYSTEM CONTROL) IF CON Judged that SYSTEM CONTROL is Faulty Power Off from Diagnosis Mode of IF CON Forced Power Off by the User Power Off by Power Supply Voltage Monitor

Diag All Check No. 2 Version 2-3. ROM Check Sum Check Sum = xxxx

03 : 04 : 05 : 06 :

Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

For the ROM Check, the check sum calculated by the Syscon is output, and therefore you must compare it with the specified value for confirmation. Following the message, press [NEXT] key to go to the next item, or [PREV] key to repeat the same check again. To quit the diagnosis and return to the Check Menu screen, press [STOP] or [ENTER] key. If an error occurred, the diagnosis is suspended and the error code is displayed as shown below.

### Syscon Diagnosis ###

3-3. EEPROM Check Error 03: EEPROM Write/Reed N Address : 00000001 Write Data : 2492 Read Data : 2490 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

Press [STOP] key to quit the diagnosis, or [PREV] key to repeat the same item where an error occurred, or [NEXT] key to continue the check from the item next to faulty item.

6-1

Submenu Selecting 2 and subsequent items calls the submenu screen of each item. For example, if 5. Supply is selected, the following submenu will be displayed.
### Syscon Diagnosis ### Check Menu No. 5 Supply Quit All ARP Register Check ARP to RAM Data Bus ARP to RAM Address Bus ARP RAM Check

(2-4) Model Type Model code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The model code read from the EEPROM is displayed with 2-digit hexadecimal number. Model Type US, Canadian 2 0

0. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. _

(2-5) Region Region code is displayed. Error: Not detected. The region code determined from the model code is displayed. (2-6) AD 3 PORT Check AD 3 PORT status is displayed. Error: Not detected. Which status, High (Pull Up), NC (Non Connect), or Low (Pull Down), the AD 3 PORT is placed in now is checked.

0. Quit
Quit the submenu and return to the main menu.

1. All
All submenu items continuous check. This menu checks 2 and subsequent items successively. At the item where visual check is required for judgment or an error occurred, the checking is suspended and the message is output for key entry. Normally, all items are checked successively one after another automatically unless an error is found. Selecting 2 and subsequent items executes respective menus and outputs the results. For the contents of each submenu, see General Description of Checking Method and Check Items List. General Description of Checking Method

3. Peripheral
(3-2) Gate Array Check Data write read, and accord check Error 02: Gate array write/read discord Data of 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the address 0xF and then read for checking. (3-3) EEPROM Check Data write read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the address 0x00 to 0xFF of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM.

2. Version
(2-2) Revision ROM revision number is displayed. Error: Not detected. The revision number defined in the source file of ROM (IC107) is displayed with four digits. (2-3) ROM Check Sum Check sum is calculated. Error: Not detected. 8-bit data are added up to the ROM (IC107) address 0x000F0000 to 0x002EFFFF, and the result is displayed with 4-digit hexadecimal number. Error is not detected. Compare the result with the specified value.

4. Servo
(4-2) Servo DSP Check Data write read, and accord check Error 12: Read data discord 0x9249, 0x2942 and 0x4294 are written to the RAM address 0x602 of the Servo DSP and then read for checking. Also, OPT type 1 LASER or 2 LASER is displayed. (4-3) DSP Driver Test Test signal data DSP Driver Error: Not detected. Caution: Do not perform this checking with the mechanical deck connected. The maximum voltage is applied to the Servo Driver IC (IC401). If the mechanical deck is connected, it will be destroyed immediately. Following the output message, disconnect the mechanical deck, then enter the specified 4- or 5-digit value from the commander, and press the [ENTER] key. The test is conducted only if the entered value accords. To exit the test, check the output level, then press [NEXT] key. This check is not conducted, but skipped in All menu item. Supplement: How to disconnect mechanical deck Disconnect flexible flat cables connected to the CN201 and CN202 of MB-100 board. Also, disconnect flat cable from the CN402.

6-2

5. Supply
(5-2) ARP Register Check Data write read, and accord check Error 08: ARP register write, and read data discord Data 0x00 to 0xFF is written sequentially to the ARP TMAX register (address 0xC6) and then read for checking. (5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus Data write read, and accord check Error 09: ARP RAM data bus error Data 0x0001 to 0x8000 where one bit each is set to 1 are written to the address 0 of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC302) through the bus, then they are read and checked. In case of discord, written bit pattern and read data are displayed. If data where multiple bits are 1 are read, the bits concerned may touch each other. Further, if data where certain bit is always 1 or 0 regardless of written data, the line could be disconnected or shorted. (5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus Data write other address read discord check Error 10: ARP RAM address bus error Caution: Address and data display in case of an error is different from the display of other diagnosis (described later). Before starting the test, all addresses of RAM (IC303) are cleared to 0x0000. First, 0xA55A is written to the address 0x00000, and the address data are read and checked from addresses 0x00001 to 0x80000 while shifting 1 bit each. Next, the data at that address is cleared, and it is written to the address 0x00001, and read and checked in the same manner. This check is repeated up to the address 0x80000 while shifting the address data by 1 bit each. If data other than 0 is read at the addresses except written address, an error is given because all addresses were already cleared to 0. In this check, the error display pattern is different from that of other diagnosis; read data, written address, and read address are displayed in this order. However, the message uses same template, and accordingly exchange Address and Data when reading. The following display, for example,
### Syscon Diagnosis ###

(5-5) ARP RAM Check Data write read, and accord check Error 11: ARP RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM are copied to all areas of RAM (IC303) connected to the ARP (IC302) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. If the detail check was selected initially, the data are written to all areas and read, then the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 11, and the test is suspended.

6. AV Decoder
(6-2) 1930 RAM Data write read, and accord check Error 13: AVD RAM read data discord The program code data stored in ROM (IC107) are copied to all areas of RAM (IC504, IC505) connected to the AVD (IC503) through the bus, then they are read and checked if they accord. Further, the same test is conducted once again with the data where all bits are inverted between 1 and 0. If discord is detected, faulty address, written data, and read data are displayed following the error code 13, and the test is suspended. During the test, OSD display becomes blank as the OSD area is also checked. (6-3) 1930 SP ROM AVD RAM Video OUT Error: Not detected. The data including sub picture streams in ROM (IC107) are transferred to the RAM (IC504, IC505) in AVD (IC503), and output as video signals from the AVD (IC503). Though OSD display becomes blank, the output of video signals continues until the key is pressed. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/ C, Component).

7. Video
(7-2) Color Bar AVD color bar command write Video OUT Error: Not detected. The command is transferred to the AVD, and the color bar signals are output from video terminals. They are output from all video terminals (Composite, Y/C, Component).

5-4. ARP to RAM Address Bus Error 10: ARP - RAM Address B Address : 0000A55A Write Data : 00000000 Read Data : 00080000 Press NEXT Key to Continue Press PREV Key to Repeat _

8. Audio
(8-2) ARP 1930 Error 14 : ARP 1930 video NG 15 : ARP 1930 audio NG (8-3) Test Tone A pink noise signal is output from the AVD (IC503) through optical coaxial digital terminal and analog audio terminal. Error: Not detected. After turning on all outputs, each time the [NEXT] key is pressed, the output channel is switched for individual channel checking. Left + Right Left Right are checked in this order.

shows the data 0xA55A was read from address 0x00080000 though it was written to the address 0x00000000. This implies that these addresses are in the form of shadow. Also, if the read data is not 0xA55A, another error will be present.

6-3

9. Progre Device
(9-2) I/P Converter Data write read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord Data 0xCC is written to the address 0x9B of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM. (9-3) Video Encoder Data write read, and accord check Error 03: EEPROM write/read discord Data 0x10 is written to the address 0xA0 of the EEPROM and then read for checking. Before writing, the data are saved, then after checking, they are written to restore the contents of EEPROM. (9-4) Progre Video ROM ARP Video OUT Error: Not detected. To confirm the Progressive output, the colorbar signals are taken from ROM (IC107 or IC108) to ARP (IC302) and output from AVD (IC503) from all video terminal. Check Items List 2) Version (2-2) Revision (2-3) ROM Check Sum (2-4) Model Type (2-5) Region 3) Peripheral (3-2) Gate Array Check (3-3) EEPROM Check 4) Servo (4-2) Servo DSP Check (4-3) DSP Driver Test 5) Supply (5-2) ARP Register Check (5-3) ARP to RAM Data Bus (5-4) ARP to RAM Address Bus (5-5) ARP RAM Check 6) AV Decoder (6-2) 1930 RAM (6-3) 1930 SP 7) Video (7-2) Color Bar 8) Audio (8-2) ARP 1930 (8-3) Test Tone 9) Progre Device (9-2) I/P Converter (9-3) Video Encoder (9-4) Progre Video

Error Codes List 00: Error not detected 01: RAM write/read data discord 02: Gate array NG 03: EEPROM NG 04: Flash memory clear error 05: Flash memory write error 06: Flash memory read data discord 07: 2725 read data discord 08: ARP register read data discord 09: ARP RAM data bus error 10: ARP RAM address bus error 11: ARP RAM read data discord 12: Servo DSP NG 13: 1930 SDRAM NG 14: ARP 1930 video NG 15: ARP 1930 audio NG 16: 1910 UCODE download NG 17: System call error (function not supported) 18: System call error (parameter error) 19: System call error (illegal ID number) 20: System call error (time out) 21: NAND Flash faulty blocks exceed 10 90: Error occurred 91: User verification NG 92: Diagnosis cancelled

6-4

6-4.

DRIVE AUTO ADJUSTMENT

On the Test Mode Menu screen, press [1] key on the remote commander, and the drive auto adjustment menu will be displayed.
## Drive Auto Adjustment ## Adjustment Menu 0. 1. 2. 3. 4. ALL DVD-SL CD DVD-DL LCD

1. DVD-SL (single layer) Select [1], insert DVD single layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. DVD Single Layer Disc Adjustment Steps 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. SLED TILT Reset Disc Check Memory SL Set Disc Type SL Spdl Start Wait 1 sec LD ON Focus Error Check Focus ON 0 Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 Trv Level Check Tracking ON Wait 100 msec CLVA ON Wait 500 msec Sled ON Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 EQ Boost Adjust Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust RF Level Measure Jitter Disp ON Jitter Memory Jitter Disp OFF Eep Copy Loop Filter Offset All Servo Stop

Exit: RETURN

Normally, [0] is selected to adjust DVD (single layer), CD, DVD (dual layer), and LCD (SACD) in this order. But, individual items can be adjusted for the case where adjustment is suspended due to an error. In this mode, the adjustment can be made easily through the operation following the message displayed on the screen. Which disc is currently adjusted is displayed on the fluorescent display tube. The disc used for adjustment must be the one specified for adjustment. 0. ALL You will be asked if EEPROM data are initialized or not, and for this prompt, select [0] and press the [ENTER] key. First , the servo setting data in EEPROM, Emergency History and Hour Meter are cleared to initialize. Then, 1. DVD-SL disc, 2. CD disc, 3. DVDDL disc, and 4. LCD disc (SACD disc) are adjusted in this order. Each time one disc was adjusted, it is ejected, and therefore exchange the disc following the message. Though the message to confirm whether the discs is to be adjusted is not displayed except for LCD disk (SACD disk), you can exit the adjustment by pressing the [STOP] button. In adjusting each disc, the mirror time is measured to check the disk type. In the auto adjustment, whether the disc type is correct is not checked unlike conventional models, and accordingly, take care not to insert a different type of disc.

6-5

2. CD Select [2], insert CD disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. CD Adjustment Steps 1. Sled Tilt Reset 2. Disc Check Memory CD 3. Set Disc Type CD 4. Spdl Start 5. Wait 1 sec 6. LD ON 7. Focus Error Check 8. Fcs ON 1 9. Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 10. Trv Level Check 11. Tracking ON 12. Wait 100 msec 13. CLVA ON 14. Wait 500 msec 15. Sled ON 16. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 17. Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 18. Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 19. Eq Boost Adjust 20. Auto Loop Filter Offset Adjust 21. Auto Track Gain Adjust 22. RF Level Measure 23. Jitter Disp ON 24. Jitter Memory 25. Jitter Disp OFF 26. All Servo Stop

3. DVD-DL (dual layer) Select [3], insert DVD dual layer disc, and press [ENTER] key, and the adjustment will be made through the following steps, then adjusted values will be written to the EEPROM. DVD Dual Layer Disc Adjustment Steps 1. Sled Tilt Reset 2. Disc Check Memory DL 3. Set Disc Type DL Layer 1 Adjust Spdl Start (Wait 1 sec) LD ON Fcs ON 1 Auto Track Offset Adjust L1 Tracking ON Wait 100 msec Clva ON (Wait 500 msec) Sled ON Auto Focus Gain Adjust L1 Auto Focus Balance Adjust L1 Eq Boost Adjust L1 Auto Track Gain Adjust L1 Jitter Disp ON Jitter Memory Jitter Disp Off Layer 0 Adjust Focus Jump (L1 L0) Auto Track Offset Adjust L0 Tracking ON (Wait 100 msec) Clva ON (Wait 500 msec) Sled ON Auto Focus Gain Adjust L0 Auto Focus Balance Adjust L0 Eq Boost Adjust L0 Auto Track Gain Adjust L0 Jitter Disp ON Jitter Memory Jitter Disp OFF All Servo Stop

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.

19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31.

4. LCD (SACD) This model does not adjust it because the adjusted data of CD are reflected.

6-6

6-5.

DRIVE MANUAL OPERATION

0.

Disc Check Memory


Disc Check

On the Test Mode Menu screen, select [2], and the manual operation menu will be displayed. For the manual operation, each servo on/off control and adjustment can be executed manually.
## Drive Manual Operation ## Operation Menu Disc type Servo Control Track/Layer Jump Manual Adjustment Auto Adjustment Memory Check

1. SL Disc Check 2. CD Disc Check 3. DL Disc Check

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

0. Reset SLED TILT

0. Disc Check Memory Exit: RETURN

In using the manual operation menu, take care of the following points. These commands do not provide protection, thus requiring correct operation. The sector address or time code field is displayed when a disc is loaded. 1. Set correctly the disc type to be used on the Disc Type screen. The disc type must be set after a disc was loaded. The set disc type is cleared when the tray is opened. 2. After power ON, if the Drive Manual Operation was selected, first perform Reset SLED TILT by opening 1. Disc Type screen. 3. In case of an alarm, immediately press the [STOP] button to stop the servo operation, and turn the power OFF. Basic operation (controllable from front panel or remote commander)

On this screen, the mirror time is measured and written to the EEPROM to check the disc type. First, set a DVD SL disc and press [1], then set a CD disc and press [2], and finally set a DVD DL disc and press [3]. The measured mirror time is displayed respectively. The adjustment must be executed more than once after default data were written. Reference value for DVD is from 10 to 20, and for CD, from 28 to 4F. Check that the value of CD is larger than that of DVD. When those values are beyond a range perform this adjustment again. From this screen, you can go to another mode by pressing [NEXT] or [PREV] key, but you cannot enter this mode from another mode. You can enter this mode from the Operation Menu screen only.

1.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0.

Disc Type
Disc Type Disc Type Auto Check DVD SL 12 cm DVD DL 12 cm CD 12cm LCD 12 cm DVD SL 8 cm DVD DL 8 cm CD 8 cm LCD 8 cm Reset SLED TILT EMG. 00

[POWER] [STOP] [OPEN/CLOSE] [RETURN] [NEXT], [PREV] [1] to [9], [0]


Cursor UP/DOWN

Power OFF Servo stop Stop+Eject/Loading Return to Operation Menu or Test Mode Menu Transition between sub modes of menu Selection of menu items Increase/Decrease in manually adjusted value

On this screen, select the disc type. To select the disc type, press the number of the loaded disc. The selected disc type is displayed at the bottom. Selecting [1] automatically selects and displays the disc type. In case of wrong display, retry Disc Check Memory. Also, opening the tray causes the set disc type to be cleared. In this case, set the disc type again after loading. In performing manual operation, the disc type must be set. Once the disc type has been selected, the sector address or time code display field will appear as shown below. These values are displayed when PLL is locked.
Disc Type Disc Type Auto Check DVD SL 12 cm DVD DL 12 cm CD 12cm LCD 12 cm DVD SL 8 cm DVD DL 8 cm CD 8 cm LCD 8 cm Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0.

Display when DVD SL 12cm disc was selected

6-7

[5] Sled
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0. CD Disc Type Disc Type Auto Check DVD SL 12 cm DVD DL 12 cm CD 12cm LCD 12 cm DVD SL 8 cm DVD DL 8 cm CD 8 cm LCD 8 cm Reset SLED TILT TC.---:---:--- EMG. 00 12 cm

Turn ON/OFF the sled servo. Turn ON/OFF normal servo of spindle servo. Apply same voltage as that of focus search to the focus drive to check the focus drive system. Move the sled outward. Perform this operation with the tracking servo turned off. Move the sled inward. Perform this operation with the tracking servo turned off.

[6] CLVA [7] FCS. Srch

Sled FWD

Display when CD 12cm disc was selected

Sled REV

[0] Reset SLED TILT [1] Disc Type Check

Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial position. Judge automatically the loaded disc. As the judged result is displayed at the bottom of screen, make sure that it is correct. If Disc Check Memory menu has not been executed after EEPROM default setting, the disc type cannot be judged. In this case, return to the initial menu and make a check for three types of discs (SL, DL, CD). Select the loaded disc. The adjusted value is written to the address of selected disc. No further entry is necessary if [1] was selected.

3. Track/Layer Jump
Tracking/Layer Jump 1Tj FWD R. Fj (L1 L0) 1Tj REV L. Fj (L0 L1) 2Tj FWD U. Lj (L1 L0) 2Tj REV D. Lj (L0 L1) NTj FWD NTj REV 500Tj FWD 500Tj REV 10k/20k FWD 10k/20k REV SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 0.

[2] to [9]

On this screen, track jump, etc. can be performed. Only for the DVD-DL, the focus jump and layer jump are displayed in the right field.

2. Servo Control [1] 1Tj FWD


1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Servo Control LD Off R. Sled FWD SP Off L. Sled REV Focus Off TRK. Off Sled Off CLVA Off FCS. Srch Off

1-track jump forward. 1-track jump reverse. 2-track jump forward. 2-track jump reverse. N-track jump forward. N-track jump reverse. Fine search forward. Fine search reverse. Direct search forward. Direct search reverse.

[2] 1Tj REV [3] 2Tj FWD [4] 2Tj REV [5] NTj FWD

0. Reset SLED TILT SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm

[6] NTj REV [7] 500Tj FWD [8] 500Tj REV [9] 10k/20k FWD [0] 10k/20k REV

On this screen, the servo on/off control necessary for replay is executed. Normally, turn on each servo from 1 sequentially and when CLVA is turned on, the usual trace mode becomes active. In the trace mode, DVD sector address or CD time code is displayed. This is not displayed where the spindle is not locked. The spindle could run overriding the control if the spindle system is faulty or RF is not present. In such a case, do not operate CLVA.

The following commands are valid for DVD-DL disc only Fj (L1 L0) Fj (L0 L1) Lj (L1 L0) Lj (L0 L1) Focus jump forward. (Trk/Sled Servo OFF) Focus jump reverse. (Trk/Sled Servo OFF) Layer jump forward. (Trk/Sled Servo ON) Layer jump reverse. (Trk/Sled Servo ON)

[0] Reset SLED TILT [1] LD [2] SP [3] Focus [4] TRK

Reset the Sled and Tilt to initial position. Turn ON/OFF the laser. Turn ON/OFF the spindle. Search the focus and turn on the focus. Turn ON/OFF the tracking servo.

6-8

4. Manual Adjustment
Manual Adjustment 1. TRK. Offset 2. Focus Gain 3. TRK. Gain 4. Focus Offset 5. Focus Balance 6. L.F. Offset 7. EQ BOOST 8. GD ADJ Adjustment : Up/Down Jitter 1D SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm

[6] Auto EQ [7] Auto L.F. Offset [8] Auto Group Delay 6. Memory Check
EEPROM DATA 1 Focus Gain TRK. Gain FCS Balance Focus Bias TRV. Offset L.F. Offset EQ Boost Mirror Time _ DOWN : Next Data CLEAR: Default Set CD xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx LCD xx xx xx xx xx xx xx -- SL xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx DL - L0 L1 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

Adjusts loop filter offset.

On this screen, each item can be adjusted manually. Select the desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and current setting for the selected item will be displayed, then increase or decrease numeric value with key or key. This value is stored in the EEPROM. If CLV has been applied, the jitter is displayed for reference for the adjustment.

page. 1/2

[1] TRK. Offset [2] Focus Gain [3] TRK. Gain [4] Focus Offset [5] Focus Balance [6] L.F. Offset [7] EQ BOOST [8] GD ADJ 5. Auto Adjustment
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto

Adjusts tracking offset.


EEPROM DATA 2

Adjusts focus gain. Adjusts track gain. Adjusts focus offset. Adjusts focus balance. Adjusts loop filter offset.

CD RF Jitter xx RF Level xx FE Level xx FE Balance xx TRV. Level xx Analog FRSW xx PLL Dac Gain xx

LCD -----xx xx

- SL xx xx xx xx xx xx xx

DL - L0 L1 xx xx -- --- --- --- -xx xx xx xx

_ UP : Prev Data CLEAR: Default Set

page. 2/2

Auto Adjustment TRK. Offset Focus Balance Focus Offset Focus Gain TRK. Gain EQ L.F. Offset Group Delay

On this screen, current servo adjusted data stored in the EEPROM are displayed. The adjusted data are initialized by pressing the [CLEAR] key, but be careful that they are not recoverable after initialization. Before clearing the adjusted data, make a note of the set data. This screen will also appear if [0] All is selected in the Drive Auto Adjustment. In this case, default setting cannot be made. For reference, the drive has been designed so that the gain center value is 20 and offset value is 80. Other values will be in a range of 10 to 80. If extreme value such as 00 or FF is set, adjustment will be faulty. In such a case, check for disc scratch or cable disconnection, then perform adjustment again.

SA.------ SI.-- EMG. 00 DVD SL 12 cm

On this screen, each item can be adjusted automatically. Select the desired number [1] to [8] from the remote commander, and selected item is adjusted automatically.

[1] Auto TRK. Offset

Adjusts tracking offset.

[2] Auto Focus Balance Adjusts focus balance. [3] Auto Focus Offset [4] Auto Focus Gain [5] Auto TRK. Gain
Adjusts focus offset. Adjusts focus gain. Adjusts track gain.

6-9

6-6. MECHA AGING


### Mecha Aging ###

How to see Emergency History


3 1 2

1.

Press OPEN key

Abort: STOP key

1: Emergency Code 2: Don't Care These codes are used for verification of software designing. 3: Historical order 1 to 9 Emergency Codes List 10: Communication to IC202 (MB-100 board) failed. 11: Each servo for focus, tracking, and spindle is unlocked. 12: Communication to EEPROM, IC101 (MB-100 board) failed. 13: Writing of hours meter data to EEPROM, IC101 (MB-100 board) failed. 14: Communication to Servo DSP IC302 (MB-100 board) failed, or Servo DSP is faulty. 20: Initialization of tilt servo and sled servo failed. They are not placed in the initial position. 21: Tilt servo operation error 22: Syscon made a request to move the tilt servo to wrong position. 23: Sled servo operation error 24: Syscon made a request to move the sled servo to wrong position. 30: Tracking balance adjustment error 31: Tracking gain adjustment error 32: Focus balance adjustment error 33: Focus bias adjustment error 34: Focus gain adjustment error 35: Tilt servo adjustment error 36: RF equalizer adjustment error 37: RF group delay adjustment error 38: Jitter value after adaptive servo operation is too large. 40: Focus servo does not operate. 41: With a dual layer (DL) disc, focus jump failed. 50: CLV (spindle) servo does not operate. 51: Spindle does not stop. 60: With a DVD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent address. 61: With a CD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent address. 62: With a CD disc, Syscon made a request to seek nonexistent track No. and index No. 63: With a DVD disc, seeking of target address failed. 64: With a CD disc, seeking of target address failed. 65: With a CD disc, seeking of target index failed. 70: With a DVD disc, physical information data could not be read. 71: With a CD disc, TOC data could not be read. 80: Disc type judgment failed. 81: As disc type judgment failed, retry was repeated. 82: As disc type judgment failed, a measurement error occurred. 83: Disc type could not be judged within the specified time. 84: Illegal command code was received from Syscon. 85: Illegal command was received from Syscon.

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [3] executes the aging of mechanism. First, open the tray and load a disc. Press the [PLAY] key, and the aging will start. When the tray is closed, the disc type and size are judged and displayed. During aging, the repeat cycle is displayed. Aging can be aborted at any time by pressing the [STOP] key. After the operation has stopped, unload the disc and press again the [STOP] key or the [RETURN] key to return to the Test Mode Menu.

6-7. EMERGENCY HISTORY


### MEG. History ### Laser Hours CD DVD xxxxxxxh xxxxxxxh

1. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 2. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Select: 1 9 Scroll: UP/DOWN (1: Last EMG.) Exit: Return

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [4] displays the information such as servo emergency history. The history information from last 1 up to 10 can be scrolled with key or key. Also, specific information can be displayed by directly entering that number with ten keys. The upper two lines display the laser ON total hours. Data below minutes are omitted. Clearing History Information Clearing laser hours Press [DISPLAY] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Both CD and DVD data are cleared. Clearing emergency history Press [TITLE] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. Initializing set up data Press [DVD] and [CLEAR] keys in this order. The data have been initialized when Set Up Initialized message is displayed. The EMG. History screen will be restored soon.

6-10

6-8.

VERSION INFORMATION
## Version Information ##

6-10. IF CON SELF DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION


1. IF-83 BOARD (IF CON) TEST MODE
The front board test mode is the IF CON self diagnostic mode. The IF CON can diagnose the functions of the front panel boards that the IF CON controls. Normally, the IF CON makes a serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL and operates following the commands from the SYSTEM CONTROL, but in the Test mode, the IF CON operates independently from the SYSTEM CONTROL. In the Test mode, the following functions can be checked. 1. Button function 2. Remote commander receiving function 3. SYSTEM CONTROL-IF CON serial communication 4. Click shuttle function 5. Fluorescent display tube lighting check Grid check Anode check 6. LED control function In the Test mode, the set operates same as usual, except voltage monitoring, communication monitoring, display of fluorescent display tube, and LED control. 1. The routine that monitors +3.3 V (P-CONT) of MB-100 board is not provided. 2. The monitoring timer for serial communication with the SYSTEM CONTROL is not provided. The set is not placed in the Standby mode, even if the communication with SYSTEM CONTROL is normal. 3. Display of fluorescent display tube (normally, display is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL) 4. LED control (normally, control is made following the commands from SYSTEM CONTROL)

IF con.

Ver : x. xxx (xxxx) Group 00

SYScon.

Ver : x. xxx (xxxx) Model xx Region 0x Servo DSP. Ver : 1. xxxx OPT Type : x LASER Exit: RETURN _

The ROM version, region code, OPT type, etc. are displayed if [5] is selected in the Test Mode Menu. The parenthesized hexadecimal number in the version number field indicates the checksum value of the ROM. Note : After down loading ROM data, sometimes it happens that checksum is not the same as that of ROM data which has been down loaded. In such a case, go back to the menu and select 0. Syscon Diagnosis, then select 1. All in 2. Version. If the result of this operation does not give an agreement, it must be either Down Load error or ROM error.

6-9.

VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT

On the Test Mode Menu screen, selecting [6] displays color bars for video level adjustment. During display of color bars, OSD disappears but the menu screen will be restored if pressing any key.

1. VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT


Measurement point : LINE OUT VIDEO (75 terminating resistance) Measuring instrument : Oscilloscope Adjustment device : RV501 on MB-100 board 0.04 Specified value : 1.00 + 0.02 Vp-p

2. OPERATION OF SELF CHECK MODE


The Self Check mode is the function to conduct the basic test to the FL display and DVD panel section. 2-1. Self Check Mode Transition Processing At the AC Power ON after IF CON (IC404) was reset, the input to 10pin (SELF CHECK) is judged and if Low is entered, the main unit transits to the Self Check mode. In this port input judgment, the result of 3-time attempts must be same (assuming that the MB100 and AV-58 boards are not connected). While pressing the [STOP] key on the main unit with the IF CON in STANDBY mode, enter [RETURN] [DISPLAY] (or [SET UP]) on the remote commander, and the unit transits to the Self Check Mode. The Self Check mode terminates when the IF CON transits to the STANDBY mode.

0.04 1.00 + 0.02Vp-p

2. PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT


Measurement point : COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) (75 terminating resistance) Measuring instrument : Oscilloscope Adjustment device : RV901 on MB-100 board 0.04 Specified value : 1.00 + 0.02 Vp-p

1.00

+ 0.04 0.02

Vp-p

6-11

2-2. Operation of Auto Self Check When the Self Check mode becomes active at the AC Power ON or by key input, the test display of the following steps (1) to (4) is repeated. (1) FLD and LED all ON (for 5 seconds)
VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM DISC NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

(2) MODEL display (for 2 seconds)


VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM DISC NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

(3) Version display (for 2 seconds)


VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

(4) ROM creation date display (for 2 seconds)


VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

6-12

2-3. Each Self Check Function Each Self Check function tests the FLD display, LED display, and key input.
Input Voltage [V] IC404: Pin No. (Signal) Pin ed (BNRKEY) Pin ef (O/C) Pin eg (PLAY) Pin eh (DISPLAY) Pin ej (CURSOR)

0 0.70 1.31 1.97 2.59 3.3

SURROUND BNR

OPEN/CLOSE PAUSE PREVIOUS NEXT

PLAY

STOP DISPLAY DVD MENU RETURN TITLE

ENTER DOWN LEFT UP RIGHT

2-3-1. FLD and LED All ON 2-3-1-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode [STOP] key and [OPEN/CLOSE] key on the main unit [LEFT] key on the main unit and the remote commander 2-3-1-2. Operation and Display In this mode, all LEDs except STANDBY LED and all segments of FLD turn ON. Example of FLD all ON
VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

2-3-2. Main Unit Key Name Display and Key Code Display 2-3-2-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode Keys on main unit except keys transited in self check 2-3-2-2. Operation and Display When a key on the main unit is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the [DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. NOTHING is displayed when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a communication error occurred. FLD display (at input of [PLAY] key on the main unit)
VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

6-13

Key code display (at input of [PLAY] key, Key code: 0Ah)
VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM DISC NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

At input of faulty voltage


VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM REPEAT 1 A- B PBC DISC NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

When two keys are pressed


VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM DISC NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

2-3-3. Remote Commander Key Name Display and Key Code Display 2-3-3-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode Remote commander keys except keys transited in self check 2-3-3-2. Operation and Display When a key on the remote commander is pressed in the Self Check mode, the name of that key is displayed on the FLD. Also, the key name display and the key code display can be switched with the [DISPLAY] key on the remote commander. NOTHING is displayed when nothing is entered. Also, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on when a communication error occurred. Remote commander key name display (at input of [PAUSE] key)

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM

DISC

NTSC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

Remote commander key code display (at input of [PAUSE] key, Key code: 39h)

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM

DISC

NTSC

TITLE

TRACK

CHAP

INDEX

HOUR

MIN

SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

6-14

2-3-4. Communication Monitoring Display The communication state is monitored and displayed while the key name on the main unit and the remote commander is displayed. When the communication to the System Controller failed, VIDEO CD, DVD, and CD segments turn on. Communication error display (at no key input)
TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

Communication error display (at code display without input of the remote commander)
TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM

DISC

NTSC

TITLE

MIN

SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

2-3-5. FLD Anode Test Display and SHUTTLE Click Operation Test 2-3-5-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode [RIGHT] on the main unit and the remote commander SHUTTLE on the main unit during Anode Test display 2-3-5-2. Operation and Display The Self Check mode transits to this mode when [RIGHT] key is entered. Only the first segment of each grid of FLD turns on, and each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the segment of each grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the segment switches in 1 2 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 2 1 direction. This tests whether each segment turns on individually. Display at the start of Anode Test
TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

TITLE TRACK

(Input in CW direction)
CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

6-15

2-3-6. FLD Grid Test Display and SHUTTLE Click Operation Test 2-3-6-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode [UP] on the main unit and the remote commander SHUTTLE on the main unit during Grid Test display 2-3-6-2. Operation and Display The Self Check mode transits to this mode when [UP] key is entered. The first grid of FLD all turns on and other grids turn off. Each time the SHUTTLE is entered, the grid is switched in order. When SHUTTLE input is clockwise, the grid switches in 1 2 3 direction, or counterclockwise it switches in 3 2 1 direction. This tests whether each grid turns on individually. Display at the start of Grid Test
VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM DISC NTSC TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM DISC NTSC TITLE

(Input in CW direction)
TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

2-3-7. LED Test Display 2-3-7-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode [DOWN] on the main unit and the remote commander SHUTTLE on the main unit during LED Test display 2-3-7-2. Operation and Display LED is switched in order by the input of JOG/SHUTTLE. Also, LED ON/OFF is switched by the input of same key as the function that turns on the LED concerned. For the MULTI LED (PROGRESSIVE) only, there is no key which switches that function, and therefore use the [RETURN] key on the main unit. FLD display during LED Test
TITLE TRACK CHAP INDEX HOUR MIN SEC

VIDEO CD DVD CD
MPEG PGM

DISC

NTSC

SHUFFLE REPEAT 1 A- B PBC

DTS ANGLE

Digital

2-3-8. Beep Sound Test 2-3-8-1. Transition Keys in Self Check Mode Input of a key on main unit 2-3-8-2. Operation and Display In the Self Check mode, each time a key on the main unit is entered, a beep sound of 1kHz (100ms) is generated.

6-16

1G

2G

3G

4G

5G

6G

7G

8G

9G

10G

11G

12G

f g r

h s

b col

m n p c

Dp d ( 1G~12G )
ANODE CONNECTION 1G P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 2G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 3G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 4G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 5G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 6G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 7G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 8G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp col 9G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 10G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp col 11G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d Dp 12G a h j k b f m s g e n p r c d -

6-17

6-11. TROUBLESHOOTING
6-11-1. Cannot Enter Test Mode
You cannot enter the Test mode when either button has been pressed by any reason with the board assembled in the front panel. In this state, the power does not turn on even under normal condition (the set is kept in standby state), and also no button is active and the remote commander is not accepted. In this case, disconnect the MB-100 board and AV-58 board, and with the SELF CHECK (0 pin) of IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board kept in low state, supply AC, and the Test mode will be forcibly activated. Or, on the board, short the land printed as SELF to enter the Test mode. The IF CON (IC404) checks the SELF CHECK port only after the power on reset (only at AC supply, not in standby state). If any button is pressed, its name is displayed on the fluorescent display tube. But, if other than NOTHING is displayed though no button is pressed, it means that any button has been pressed.

6-11-2. Faults in Test Mode (MB-100 Board)


1. Test mode menu is not displayed Board visual check Check main ICs, SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), ROM (IC107 or IC108), AVD (IC503), and ARP&SERVO (IC302), for mounting condition, direction, or evidence of short between pins, or soldering failure. Also, compare with good board to check if there are missing capacitors or resistors. Clock signal check Measure the clock frequency at CPUCK (uj pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) using an oscilloscope. If 33 MHz is outputted, an access to the ROM is normal, and then check the items in 1-2. In the case of 8.25 MHz output, check the items in 1-1. If it is fixed to H or L, the X101 or SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) will be faulty. 1-1. CPUCK (33 MHz) is not outputted Power supply voltage check Check the power connectors of the boards or power input pins of the ICs for voltage. Check the ICs in order of SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), ROM (IC107 or IC108), AVD (IC503), and ARP&SERVO (IC302). If correct voltage is not outputted, the power line will be shorted, or soldering or IC will be faulty. Reset signal check Check that the XFRRST (uh pin) of SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is H (3.3 V). If not H, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. XRD, XWRH, and CS0X signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the XRD (u; pin), XWRH (ua pin), and CS0X (tk pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to L (0 V) or H (3.3 V), or if they are on the intermediate potential between L and H. If they are fixed to L or H, or on the intermediate potential, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. HA [0 21] and HD [0 15] signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the HA [0 21] (<z/x> <z/.>, <zzz> <zz,>, <zx/>, 1 5 pins) and HD [0 15] (ig <z//> pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to L (0 V) or H (3.3 V), or if HA is on the intermediate potential between L and H (HD is on intermediate potential in normal state), or if same waveform as that of adjacent pins is measured. In case of L or H, intermediate potential, or same waveform, a soldering failure of that line, a shot with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful.

1-2. CPUCK (33 MHz) is outputted (communication with ROM is normal) AVD (IC503) check Using an oscilloscope, measure the SDCLKO (<zv.> pin) of the AVD (IC503) to check that 95 MHz is outputted. If not outputted, a short of 27 MHz line across CLKI (<z,/> pin) and SCLKIN (<z,x> pin), IC mounting failure, or faulty AVD (IC503) is doubtful. If 27 MHz is outputted, the communication between SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) and AVD (IC503) is disabled, and therefore check the following items, particularly the AVD (IC503). WAIT signal check Using an oscilloscope, measure the XWAIT (yj pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if it is fixed to L (0 V) or on the intermediate potential. In case of L or intermediate potential, examine CS2X CS5X (y; yd pins) to check if any pin is fixed to L. For the CS2X and CS3X, AVD (IC503) mounting failure or faulty IC is doubtful. For the CS4X and CS5X, ARP&SERVO (IC302) mounting failure or faulty IC is doubtful. If CS2X CS5X are not L, or they are sometimes on intermediate potential, a soldering failure of XWAIT line, a short with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. INT signal check Using an oscilloscope, measure the INT0 2, 4 6 (qh qk pins, w; ws pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if INT0 2, and 6 are fixed to L (0 V) and INT5 is fixed to H (3.3 V), or they are on intermediate potential. In case of L, H, or intermediate potential, a soldering failure of ICs connected to that line, a short with other line, faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), or faulty each IC is doubtful. INT0 : AVD (IC503) INT1, INT2 : ARP&SERVO (IC302) INT5, INT6 : AUDIO DSP (IC701) CSnX signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the CX0X CX7X (tk yd, yg, yh pins) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to L (0 V), or two or more CSs sometime go L, or on intermediate potential. In case of fixed L, two or more CSs on L or intermediate potential, a soldering failure of ICs connected to that line, a short with other line, faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103), or faulty each IC is doubtful. CS0X : ROM (IC107 or IC108) CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC503) CS4X, CS5X: ARP&SERVO (IC302) Other CS signals check Using an oscilloscope, measure the VESCS/X39CS (i; pin) and XDACS (ul pin) of the SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) to check if they are fixed to L. If fixed, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, or faulty SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) is doubtful. If the above checking could not find a fault, check the outputted CS signal. If CS signal other than CS0X is outputted, a mounting failure of each IC or faulty IC that corresponds to active CS signal is doubtful. CS2X, CS3X: AVD (IC503) CS4X, CS5X: ARP&SERVO (IC302) 2. Test mode menu is displayed, but operation stops when a menu is selected Using an oscilloscope, measure the PLCKO (og pin) of the ARP& SERVO (IC302) to check if it is fixed to L (0 V) or H (3.3 V). If fixed to L or H, the ARP&SERVO (IC302) is faulty. If not fixed, check the items in 1-2. in order.

6-18

3. Specific item failed in Diag All Check A mounting failure of IC or faulty IC for that item is doubtful. If 1901NG is displayed, a loose connection of CN801, mounting failure of AUDIO DSP (IC701), or faulty IC is doubtful. 4. Picture and sound are not outputted Check the CN801 for connection, and the flat cable for damage or loose connection. 5. Picture is outputted, but sound is not outputted A mounting failure of AUDIO DSP (IC801) or AUDIO DAC (IC802, IC803), power supply failure, or faulty IC is doubtful. 6. Sound is outputted, but picture is not outputted Using an oscilloscope, measure the yd, yh, yl, uf, uj, and i; pins of AVD (IC503) to check if analog signals are outputted respectively. If not outputted, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, or faulty AVD is doubtful.

If not fixed to L or H, loose connection between power supply block and IF-83 board or between IF-83 board and MB-100 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty IF-83 board is doubtful. Also check the following, as the set does not work normally under these conditions. 4. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but fluorescent display tube does not light Loose connection between power supply block and IF-83 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty IF-83 board is doubtful. 5. Picture and sound are not outputted Loose connection between power supply block and IF-83 board or between IF-83 and AV-58 board or between AV-58 board and MB-100 board, loose connection of connectors, or faulty AV-58 board is doubtful. 6. Picture is out outputted correctly A mounting failure of BNR (IC601) on the MB-100 board, or faulty AVD (IC503) or ARP&SERVO (IC302), or faulty 27 MHz output (frequency, waveform) from 27-1OUT (3 pin) of PLL (IC102) is doubtful.

6-11-3. Drive Auto Adjustment stops by an error


Faulty analog circuits of ARP&SERVO (IC302) or faulty peripheral circuits of DIGITAL SERVO (IC202) on the MB-100 board, faulty optical pickup, or loose connection of flat cable is doubtful.

6-11-5. Power is not Supplied 6-11-4. Power is Supplied but Unstable


If Syscon Diagnosis completed successfully, basically the boards other than MB-100 board, connection, optical pickup, or mechanical deck will be faulty. 1. Red LED does not light when AC is supplied Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the EVER 11 V (3 pin), EVER +3.3 V (qa pin), and EVER +11 V (qd pin) of CN201 or CN920 in the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Also check the following, as the set does not work normally under these conditions. 2. At [POWER] button ON, LED does not light in green even once, but kept in red (standby state) Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the EVER 11 V (3 pin), EVER +3.3 V (qa pin), and EVER +11 V (qd pin) of CN201 or CN920 in the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Check the P-CONT (2 pin) of CN401 on the IF-83 board if it becomes H. If not H, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, faulty AVD (IC503), loose connection between power supply block and IF-83 board, loose connection of connectors, faulty power supply block, or faulty IF-83 board is doubtful. Also check the following, as the set does not work normally under these conditions. 3. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but returns to red (standby state) after several seconds (e.g. it returns to standby state after SONY DVD was displayed) There is no regularity between faulty parts and timing when the set returns to the standby state). Check if the specified voltage is outputted from the power supply block. If not outputted, the power supply block will be faulty. Check the XFRRST (9 pin) of CN101 on the MB-100 board if it is fixed to L, or the XIBUSY (0 pin), XIFCS (qa pin), SI0 (qs pin), SO0 (qd pin) and SC0 (qf pin) of CN101 if they are fixed to L or H. If fixed to L or H, a soldering failure of that line, a short with other line, missing capacitor or resistor, or faulty AVD (IC503) is doubtful. 1. Red LED does not light when AC is supplied The power (EVER +3.3 V) is not supplied to the IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board. The X401 does not oscillate. 2. At [POWER] button ON, LED is kept in red (standby state) Any button has been pressed. The voltage at PONCHK (e; pin) of the IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board exceeds 0.5 V. 3. At [POWER] button ON, LED lights in green but returns to red (standby state) after several seconds The PONCHK (e; pin) of the IF CON (IC404) on the IF-83 board is abnormal (slow rising from 0.5 V to more than 1.5 V, or voltage not rising to more than 1.5 V). The SYSTEM CONTROL (IC103) on the MB-100 board is faulty.

6-19 6-19E

DVP-NS700P SECTION 7 ELECTRICAL ADJUSTMENT


In making adjustment, refer to 7-3. Adjustment Related Parts Arrangement. Note: During diagnostic check, the characters and color bars can be seen only with the NTSC monitor. Therefore, for diagnostic check, use the monitor that supports both NTSC and PAL modes. This section describes procedures and instructions necessary for adjusting electrical circuits in this set. Instruments required: 1) Color monitor TV 2) Oscilloscope 1 or 2 phenomena, band width over 100 MHz, with delay mode 3) Frequency counter (over 8 digits) 4) Digital voltmeter 5) Standard commander (RMT-D129A) 6) DVD reference disc HLX-501 (J-6090-071-A) (dual layer) (NTSC) HLX-503 (J-6090-069-A) (single layer) (NTSC) HLX-504 (J-6090-088-A) (single layer) (NTSC) HLX-505 (J-6090-089-A) (dual layer) (NTSC) 7) SACD reference disc HLXA-509 (J-6090-090-A) 8) Extention Cable (J-6090-107-A)

7-1. POWER SUPPLY CHECK


1. HS13S0U Board
Mode Instrument EVER +3.3 V Check Test point Specification SW +3.3 V Check Test point Specification +5 V Check Test point Specification SW +11 V Check Test point Specification EVER +11 V Check Test point Specification EVER 11 V Check Test point Specification CN201 pin 3 11.0 1.0 Vdc CN201 pin qd 11.0 1.0 Vdc CN201 pin 6, 7 11.5
+1.0 1.5 Vdc

E-E Digital voltmeter CN201 pin qa 3.5 0.2 Vdc CN201 pin 8 3.3 0.2 Vdc CN201 pin qs 5.0 0.3 Vdc

Checking method: 1) Confirm that each voltage satisfies the specification.

7-1

7-2. ADJUSTMENT OF VIDEO SYSTEM


1. Video Level Adjustment (MB-100 BOARD) <Purpose> This adjustment is made to satisfy the NTSC/PAL standard, and if not adjusted correctly, the brightness will be too large or small. Mode Signal Test point Instrument Adjusting element Specification Video level adjustment in test mode Color bars LINE OUT (VIDEO) connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope RV501 1.0
+0.04 0.02

3. Checking S Video Output S-Y <Purpose> Check S-terminal video output. If it is incorrect, pictures will not be displayed correctly in spite of connection to the TV with a Sterminal cable. Mode Signal Test point Instrument Specification Video level adjustment in test mode Color bars S VIDEO OUT (S-Y) connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope 1.0 0.05 Vp-p

Vp-p

Adjusting method: 1) In the test mode initial menu 6 Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Adjust the RV501 to attain 1.0 +0.04 0.02 Vp-p.

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu 6 Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the S-Y level is 1.0 0.05 Vp-p.

1.0 0.05 Vp-p

1.0

+0.04 0.02

Vp-p

Figure 7-3 Figure 7-1


2. Progressive Video Level Adjustment (MB-100 BOARD) <Purpose> This adjustments progressive video output. If it is incorrect, correct brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Signal Test point Instrument Adjusting element Specification Video level adjustment in test mode Color bars COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope RV901 1.00 0.02 Vp-p
+ 0.04

4. Checking S Video Output S-C <Purpose> This checks whether the S-C satisfies the NTSC/PAL Standard. If it is not correct, the colors will be too dark or light. Mode Signal Test point Instrument Specification Video level adjustment in test mode Color bars S VIDEO OUT (S-C) connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope A = 286 30 mVp-p (NTSC) A = 300 100 mVp-p (PAL)

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu 6 Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the S-C burst is A.

Adjusting method: 1) In the test mode initial menu 7 Prog Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. + 0.04 2) Adjust the RV901 to attain 1.00 0.02 Vp-p

Figure 7-4
0.04 1.00 + Vp-p 0.02

Figure 7-2

7-2

5. Checking Component Video Output Y <Purpose> This checks component video output Y. If it is incorrect, correct brightness will not be attained when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Signal Test point Instrument Specification Video level adjustment in test mode Color bars COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (Y) connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope 1.0 0.05 Vp-p

7. Checking Component Video Output R-Y <Purpose> This checks component video output R-Y. If it is incorrect, correct colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Signal Test point Instrument Specification Video level adjustment in test mode Color bars COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PR) connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope 700 50 mVp-p

7-3. ADJUSTMENT RELATED PARTS ARRANGEMENT


MB-100 BOARD (SIDE A)

RV501 VIDEO LEVEL ADJ

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu 6 Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the Y level is 1.0 0.05 Vp-p.

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu 6 Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the R-Y level is 700 50 mVp-p.

IC503

1.0 0.05 Vp-p 700 50 mVp-p


RV901
IC701 IC503 IC503 IICIIIC503

PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJ

Figure 7-5
6. Checking Component Video Output B-Y <Purpose> This checks component video output B-Y. If it is incorrect, correct colors will not be displayed when connected to, for instance, projector. Mode Signal Test point Instrument Specification Video level adjustment in test mode Color bars COMPONENT VIDEO OUT (PB) connector (75 terminated) Oscilloscope 700 50 mVp-p

Figure 7-7

HS13S0U BOARD (SIDE A)

13 CN201

Checking method: 1) In the test mode initial menu 6 Video Level Adjustment, set so that color bars are generated. 2) Confirm that the B-Y level is 700 50 mVp-p.

700 50 mVp-p

Figure 7-6

7-3

7-4 E

DVP-NS700P SECTION 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST


8-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
Items marked * are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied. Accessories and packing materials are given in the last of the electrical parts list. The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiquens pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

NOTE: -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one. Color Indication of Appearance Parts Example: KNOB, BALANCE (WHITE) . . . (RED) Parts Color Cabinet's Color

8-1-1. CASE ASSEMBLY


6 12 6

11

3 7 2 10 4 13 9 1 8

Ref. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Part No. 3-067-237-11 3-067-236-01 4-217-485-01 3-059-349-11 X-3951-613-1

Description EMBLEM (V), DVD COVER (P), TRAY EMBLEM (5-A), SONY LEG CUSHION FRONT PANEL ASSY

Remark

Ref. No. 8 9 10 11 12 13

Part No. 3-970-608-51 1-476-714-11 3-068-143-01 1-476-605-21 3-068-047-11

Description

Remark

SUMITITE (B3), +BV ENCODER, ROTARY KEY, CURSOR COMMANDER, STANDARD (RMT-D129A) CASE

3-710-901-61 SCREW, TAPPING 3-068-890-01 CUSHION, REAR LEG

3-068-142-01 RING, SHUTTLE

8-1

8-1-2. CHASSIS ASSEMBLY


55
not supplied

55 64
Mechanism deck

63 65 55 55 60 59

56 53 57 54 57 72 52 66 51 62 55 74 67

61

71

67

73
not supplied

70
The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Ref. No. * 51 52 53 54 55 0 56 57 * 59 * 60 * 61 62 Part No. 1-468-583-11 3-067-232-21 3-059-321-11 3-067-233-11 3-970-608-11 1-757-571-11 3-050-569-01 A-6065-697-A A-6065-696-A A-6065-695-A Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi. Remark

not supplied

Description POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) BUTTON (POWER) INDICATOR (P) JOINT (POWER) SUMITITE (B3), +BV CORD, POWER SUMITITE (B3), +WHD IF-83 BOARD, COMPLETE MB-100 BOARD, COMPLETE AV-58 BOARD, COMPLETE

Ref. No. 63 64 65 66 67 70 71 72 * 73 74

Part No. 1-757-693-11 1-757-694-11 1-757-697-11 4-966-267-12 3-970-608-51 3-069-090-01 1-757-800-11 1-757-804-11 A-6065-698-A 3-069-230-01

Description CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035) BUSHING (FBS001), CORD SUMITITE (B3), +BV COVER, EJECT CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-029) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMAV-003) RM-85 BOARD, COMPLETE CUSHION (LED)

Remark

1-757-798-11 CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FIR-003)

8-2

8-1-3. MECHANISM DECK ASSEMBLY

not supplied not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied

not supplied not supplied not supplied

102

102 103

102 101 103 104 103

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

Ref. No. 101 102

Part No.

Description

Remark

Ref. No. 103 0 104

Part No.

Description

Remark

A-6062-514-A LOADING ASSY (M) 3-053-847-11 INSULATOR

3-067-344-01 INSULATOR SCREW 8-820-144-06 OPTICAL PICK-UP KHM-240AAA/J1RP

8-3

AV-58
8-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
NOTE: Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set. -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one. RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: Metal-film resistor. METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. F: nonflammable Not all of the parts for POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) is listed. Items marked * are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items. SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: , for example: uA. . : A. . uPA. . : PA. . uPB. . : PB. . uPC. . : PC. . uPD. . : PD. . CAPACITORS uF: F COILS uH: H The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified. Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiquens pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi. When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board.

Ref. No. *

Part No.

Description

Remark

Ref. No. C242 C244

Part No.

Description 330uF 47uF 20% 20%

Remark 6.3V 16V

A-6065-695-A AV-58 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) < CAPACITOR > C101 C102 C103 C104 C105 C106 C107 C108 C109 C110 C111 C112 C113 C114 C115 C118 C119 C120 C121 C126 C201 C202 C203 C204 C205 C206 C207 C208 C209 C210 C211 C222 C223 C224 C227 C228 C229 C231 1-162-970-11 1-104-660-91 1-162-970-11 1-104-660-91 1-162-970-11 1-104-660-91 1-104-660-91 1-104-660-91 1-165-176-11 1-104-660-91 1-104-660-91 1-107-826-11 1-104-660-91 1-107-826-11 1-104-660-91 1-162-970-11 1-104-660-91 1-162-970-11 1-104-660-91 1-104-660-91 1-164-739-11 1-164-739-11 1-164-218-11 1-164-218-11 1-164-218-11 1-164-218-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-960-11 1-104-660-91 1-104-660-91 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-104-660-91 1-104-660-91 CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT 0.01uF 47uF 0.01uF 47uF 0.01uF 47uF 47uF 47uF 0.047uF 47uF 47uF 0.1uF 47uF 0.1uF 47uF 0.01uF 47uF 0.01uF 47uF 47uF 560PF 560PF 180PF 180PF 180PF 180PF 0.01uF 0.01uF 1uF 47uF 47uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 47uF 47uF 47uF 47uF 220uF 10% 20% 10% 20% 10% 20% 20% 20% 10% 20% 20% 10% 20% 10% 20% 10% 20% 10% 20% 20% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 10% 10% 20% 20% 20% 10% 10% 20% 20% 20% 20% 20% 25V 16V 25V 16V 25V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 25V 16V 25V 16V 16V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 25V 25V 50V 16V 16V 25V 25V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V

1-126-924-11 ELECT 1-104-660-91 ELECT < CONNECTOR >

CN102 CN202 CN203

1-794-473-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 9P 1-506-486-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 7P 1-815-461-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 25P < DIODE >

D101 D102 D103 D104 D201 D202 D205

8-719-071-15 8-719-071-15 8-719-071-15 8-719-071-15 8-719-914-43

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL HZM6.8ZWA1TL DAN202K-T-146

8-719-914-44 DIODE DAP202K-T-146 8-719-988-61 DIODE 1SS355TE-17 < IC >

IC101 IC102 IC103 IC104 IC201 IC203 IC204

8-759-667-17 8-759-826-45 8-759-011-65 8-759-684-20 8-759-909-71

IC IC IC IC IC

L79M05TLL-SONY-TL LA73050-TLM TC74HC4053AF (EL) LA7104M-TLM BA4558F-E2

8-759-711-59 IC NJM78L05UA-TE1 8-749-017-31 IC GP1FA550TZ (DIGITAL OUT-OPTICAL) < JACK >

J101 J102 J103 J201

1-815-363-11 1-815-361-11 1-815-425-11 1-793-446-21

JACK, PIN (6P) (LINE OUT) JACK, PIN 3P (COMPONENT VIDEO OUT) TERMINAL, S (2P) (S VIDEO OUT) JACK, PIN 1P (DIGITAL OUT-COAXIAL) < JUMPER RESISTOR >

JR004 JR006 JR009 JR012 JR021 JR022 JR025 JR026 JR027 JR028

1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91

SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1-104-660-91 ELECT 1-104-660-91 ELECT 1-126-934-11 ELECT

8-4

AV-58
Ref. No. JR029 JR030 JR031 JR032 JR033 JR034 JR035 JR036 JR037 JR038 JR039 Part No. 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 Description SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Remark Ref. No. R140 R141 R153 R154 R155 R156 R157 R158 R159 R160 R162 R163 R164 R165 R166 R167 R168 R169 R170 R171 R172 R201 R202 R203 R204 R205 R206 R207 R208 R209 R210 R211 R212 R213 R216 R217 R218 R219 R220 R221 R222 R224 R225 R226 R227 R228 R229 R230 R234 R235 R238 R240 R241 R242 R243 R249 R251 R252 R253 R254 Part No. 1-216-295-91 1-216-089-91 1-216-089-91 1-216-081-00 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-049-11 1-216-049-11 1-216-049-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-032-00 1-216-032-00 1-216-032-00 1-216-033-00 1-216-033-00 1-216-033-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-208-798-11 1-208-798-11 1-208-798-11 1-208-798-11 1-208-800-11 1-208-800-11 1-216-057-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-057-00 1-216-057-00 1-208-800-11 1-208-800-11 1-216-065-91 1-216-067-00 1-216-073-91 1-216-097-11 1-216-105-91 1-216-041-00 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-089-91 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-073-91 1-216-089-91 1-216-089-91 1-216-065-91 1-216-065-91 1-216-097-11 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-041-00 1-216-033-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-073-91 1-216-049-11 1-216-049-11 Description SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP 0 47K 47K 22K 0 0 1K 1K 1K 0 0 200 200 200 220 220 220 68 68 0 0 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 5.6K 5.6K 2.2K 2.2K 2.2K 2.2K 5.6K 5.6K 4.7K 5.6K 10K 100K 220K 470 10K 10K 10K 47K 470 470 10K 47K 47K 4.7K 4.7K 100K 470 470 470 470 220 68 10K 1K 1K Remark

5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

1-216-295-91 SHORT < COIL >

L101

1-412-064-11 INDUCTOR < TRANSISTOR >

100uH

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

Q101 Q102 Q103 Q104 Q105 Q106 Q107 Q201 Q202 Q203 Q204 Q205 Q207 Q208 Q211 Q216

8-729-216-22 8-729-216-22 8-729-216-22 8-729-421-19 8-729-424-08 8-729-424-18 8-729-421-19 8-729-049-31 8-729-421-19 8-729-230-49 8-729-027-53 8-729-424-02 8-729-046-97 8-729-046-97 8-729-230-49

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR

2SA1162-YG-TE85L 2SA1162-YG-TE85L 2SA1162-YG-TE85L UN2213-TX UN2111-TX UN2113-TX UN2213-TX 2SB710A-RTX UN2213-TX 2SC2712-YG-TE85L DTC124TKA-T146 2SB709A-QRS-TX 2SD1938 (F)-T (TX).SO 2SD1938 (F)-T (TX).SO 2SC2712-YG-TE85L 2SB709A-QRS-TX

0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

8-729-424-02 TRANSISTOR < RESISTOR >

R101 R102 R103 R104 R105 R106 R107 R108 R109 R111 R112 R113 R114 R115 R121 R126 R127 R128 R129 R130 R131 R133 R134 R135 R139

1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-049-11 1-216-049-11 1-216-049-11 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-061-91 1-216-061-91 1-216-022-00 1-216-022-00 1-216-022-00 1-216-073-91 1-216-021-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-021-00 1-216-089-91 1-216-295-91

RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP SHORT

10K 10K 10K 1K 1K 1K 10K 10K 10K 0 0 0 0 3.3K 3.3K 75 75 75 10K 68 68 68 68 47K 0

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W

8-5

AV-58
Ref. No. R256 R279 R280 R282

IF-83
Description RES-CHIP SHORT SHORT SHORT < SWITCH > FB401 1-469-324-21 FERRITE < IC > 0uH 1K 0 0 0 5% Remark 1/10W Ref. No. D409 D412 D414 D415 Part No. 8-719-071-15 8-719-422-62 8-719-056-06 8-719-056-06 Description DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE HZM6.8ZWA1TL MA8062-L-TX SLR-342DCT32 (BNR) SLR-342DCT32 (SURROUND) Remark

Part No. 1-216-049-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91

< FERRITE BEAD >

S101

1-692-989-11 SWITCH, SLIDE (SCAN SELECT)

A-6065-697-A IF-83 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************* (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) 3-067-239-01 HOLDER, FL < BUZZER > BZ401 1-529-986-11 BUZZER, VOLTAGE

IC403 IC404 IC405

8-759-832-05 IC BA18BC0FP-E2 6-800-321-01 IC TMP86CK74F-3CB8 8-759-684-35 IC S-80830ANUP-EDT-T2 < JUMPER RESISTOR >

JR402 JR403

1-216-295-91 SHORT 1-216-295-91 SHORT < COIL >

0 0

< CAPACITOR > L401 C401 C407 C409 C411 C412 C414 C416 C417 C419 C420 C421 C422 C423 C425 C426 C427 C428 C429 C430 C431 C432 C436 C437 C438 C439 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-933-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-968-11 1-104-666-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-964-11 1-115-339-11 1-107-826-11 1-128-131-11 1-124-234-00 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-933-11 1-164-392-11 1-115-339-11 1-162-970-11 1-164-392-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP < CONNECTOR > CN401 CN402 CN403 * CN405 CN406 1-778-317-11 1-785-694-11 1-815-458-21 1-785-530-11 1-815-381-11 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 13P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 7P CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 15P PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 10P CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 5P < DIODE > D403 D404 D405 D406 D408 8-719-041-97 8-719-041-97 8-719-041-97 8-719-041-97 8-719-071-15 DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE MA113- (TX) MA113- (TX) MA113- (TX) MA113- (TX) HZM6.8ZWA1TL R423 R424 R425 R427 R428 R429 R430 R431 R433 R434 R435 R437 R440 1-216-081-00 1-216-013-00 1-216-025-11 1-216-063-91 1-216-071-00 1-216-067-00 1-216-059-00 1-216-063-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP 22K 33 100 3.9K 8.2K 5.6K 2.7K 3.9K 10K 10K 10K 120 10K 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 100uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.0047uF 220uF 0.01uF 0.001uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 22uF 22uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 100uF 390PF 0.1uF 0.01uF 390PF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 5% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 20% 10% 10% 20% 5% 10% 10% 5% 10% 10% 10% 25V 25V 25V 16V 25V 25V 25V 50V 25V 25V 50V 50V 16V 50V 16V 25V 25V 16V 50V 50V 25V 50V 25V 25V 25V 1-408-978-21 INDUCTOR 47uH

< FLUORESCENT INDICATOR > ND401 1-517-972-11 INDICATOR TUBE, FLUORESCENT < IC LINK > 0 PS401 0 PS402 1-576-509-21 RINK, IC (1.0A) 1-576-509-21 RINK, IC (1.0A) < TRANSISTOR > Q401 Q402 Q404 Q405 8-729-056-46 8-729-056-46 8-729-048-28 8-729-424-08 TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR < RESISTOR > R401 R402 R413 R414 R415 R416 R418 R420 R421 R422 1-216-065-91 1-216-097-11 1-216-067-00 1-216-059-00 1-216-055-00 1-216-055-00 1-216-073-91 1-216-025-11 1-216-059-00 1-216-071-00 RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 4.7K 100K 5.6K 2.7K 1.8K 1.8K 10K 100 2.7K 8.2K 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 2SC5053T100Q 2SC5053T100Q 2SD1766-T100-QR UN2111-TX

1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP 1-216-027-00 METAL CHIP 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP

8-6

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

IF-83
Ref. No. R444 R446 R448 R449 R450 R455 R471 R473 R474 R481 R482 R483 R484 R485 R486 R487 R490 R491 R492 R493 R494 R495 Part No. Description 100 100K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10K 100 100 100 100 100 100 220 120 22K 47 100 100 10K 10K 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% Remark 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W Ref. No. C012 C013 C014 C015 C016 C018 C020 C021 C022 C023 C025 C026 C027 C103 C104 C105 C106 C107 C108 C109 C110 C111 C112 C113 C114 C115 C116 C118 C121 C122 C123 C124 C201 C202 C205 C206 C207 C208 C209 C215 C216 C217 C218 C219 C221 C222 C223 C224 C225 C226 C227 C228 C231 C232 C233 C234 C235 C236 C238 C239 Part No. 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-126-205-11 1-107-826-11 1-126-205-11 1-107-826-11 1-126-205-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-209-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-917-11 1-162-918-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-209-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-607-11 1-126-206-11 1-126-204-11 1-126-246-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-966-11 1-162-966-11 1-162-966-11 1-162-966-11 1-124-779-00 1-162-968-11 1-162-968-11 1-126-205-11 1-162-970-11 1-164-739-11 1-124-779-00 1-107-826-11 1-126-205-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-165-176-11 1-165-176-11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 47uF 0.1uF 47uF 0.1uF 47uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 100uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 15PF 18PF 0.01uF 100uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 47uF 100uF 47uF 220uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.0022uF 0.0022uF 0.0022uF 0.0022uF 10uF 0.0047uF 0.0047uF 47uF 0.01uF 560PF 10uF 0.1uF 47uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.001uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.047uF 0.047uF 0.01uF 1-216-025-11 RES-CHIP 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-033-00 1-216-027-00 1-216-081-00 1-216-017-91 1-216-025-11 1-216-025-11 1-216-073-91 1-216-073-91 RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP RES-CHIP < SWITCH > S401 S402 S403 S404 S405 S406 S407 S408 S409 S410 S411 S412 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (BNR) SWITCH, TACTILE (TITLE) SWITCH, TACTILE (>) SWITCH, TACTILE (SURROUND) SWITCH, TACTILE (O RETURN) SWITCH, TACTILE (x) SWITCH, TACTILE (DVD MENU) SWITCH, TACTILE (X) SWITCH, TACTILE (DISPLAY) SWITCH, TACTILE (.)

MB-100
Remark 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 20% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 5% 5% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 20% 20% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 20% 10% 5% 20% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 16V 16V 16V 6.3V 16V 6.3V 16V 6.3V 16V 25V 25V 16V 16V 25V 4V 25V 25V 50V 50V 25V 4V 25V 16V 25V 25V 25V 25V 4V 6.3V 16V 4V 25V 25V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 16V 50V 50V 6.3V 25V 50V 16V 16V 6.3V 25V 16V 25V 25V 25V 16V 16V 50V 25V 16V 16V 16V 25V

1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (H) 1-771-574-21 SWITCH, TACTILE (A) < TRANSFORMER >

T401

1-435-947-11 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERT < VIBRATOR >

X401

1-781-472-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (8MHz)

A-6065-696-A MB-100 BOARD, COMPLETE *********************** (Ref.No. 2,000 Series) < CAPACITOR > C001 C002 C003 C004 C005 C006 C007 C008 C009 C010 C011 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-126-205-11 1-126-205-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 0.1uF 47uF 47uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.001uF 0.1uF 10% 10% 20% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 16V 16V 6.3V 6.3V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 50V 16V

1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP

1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP

8-7

MB-100
Ref. No. C240 C243 C244 C246 C247 C248 C304 C305 C306 C307 C309 C310 C311 C312 C313 C315 C317 C318 C319 C320 C321 C322 C323 C324 C325 C326 C327 C328 C331 C332 C333 C334 C335 C336 C337 C338 C339 C340 C341 C342 C343 C344 C346 C347 C348 C349 C350 C351 C401 C402 C403 C404 C405 C406 C407 C408 C409 C410 C411 C412 Part No. 1-164-217-11 1-107-826-11 1-124-779-00 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-206-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-968-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-968-11 1-162-968-11 1-162-968-11 1-107-826-11 1-164-677-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-110-563-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-968-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-164-245-11 1-164-230-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-965-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-164-230-11 1-162-927-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-968-11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 150PF 0.1uF 10uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 100uF 0.01uF 0.0047uF 0.01uF 0.0047uF 0.0047uF 0.0047uF 0.1uF 0.033uF 100PF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.068uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.0047uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.015uF 220PF 100PF 0.0015uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 220PF 100PF 0.001uF 0.001uF 0.0047uF 0.033uF 5% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 5% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 5% 5% 10% 10% 10% 5% 5% 10% 10% 10% 10% Remark 50V 16V 16V 25V 16V 25V 6.3V 25V 50V 25V 50V 50V 50V 16V 16V 50V 25V 25V 16V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 16V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 50V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 50V 50V 50V 16V 16V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 16V Ref. No. C413 C414 C415 C416 C417 C418 C419 C420 C421 C427 C428 C501 C502 C503 C504 C505 C506 C508 C509 C510 C512 C513 C514 C516 C518 C519 C520 C521 C522 C523 C524 C525 C526 C528 C529 C530 C531 C532 C533 C534 C535 C536 C537 C538 C539 C540 C541 C542 C544 C545 C546 C547 C601 C602 C603 C604 C802 C807 C810 C811 Part No. 1-164-677-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-204-11 1-107-826-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-964-11 1-126-193-11 1-124-779-00 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-124-779-00 1-124-779-00 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-246-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-107-826-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.033uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.001uF 0.01uF 47uF 0.1uF 0.1uF 0.001uF 0.001uF 1uF 10uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 10uF 10uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 220uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 20% 10% 10% 20% 20% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% Remark 16V 25V 25V 25V 50V 25V 16V 16V 16V 50V 50V 50V 16V 25V 25V 16V 16V 25V 25V 25V 4V 25V 25V 25V 16V 25V 25V 16V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V

1-164-677-11 CERAMIC CHIP

1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP

8-8

MB-100
Ref. No. C812 C813 C816 C901 C902 C903 C904 C905 C906 C907 C908 C909 C910 C911 C912 C913 C914 C915 C916 C917 C919 C920 C921 C922 C923 C924 C926 C927 C928 C929 C930 C931 C932 C933 C934 C935 C936 Part No. 1-162-970-11 1-127-715-91 1-124-779-00 1-126-205-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-205-11 1-126-205-11 1-162-964-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-126-205-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-964-11 1-127-956-21 1-162-970-11 1-164-315-11 1-164-315-11 1-126-205-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-970-11 1-162-923-11 1-162-923-11 1-162-923-11 1-162-923-11 1-162-923-11 1-162-923-11 1-162-923-11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP FILM CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 0.22uF 10uF 47uF 0.01uF 47uF 47uF 0.001uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 47uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.001uF 0.1uF 0.01uF 470PF 470PF 47uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 0.01uF 47PF 47PF 47PF 47PF 47PF 47PF 47PF 47PF 0.1uF 0.1uF 10% 10% 20% 20% 10% 20% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 5% 10% 5% 5% 20% 10% 10% 10% 10% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 10% 10% Remark 25V 16V 16V 6.3V 25V 6.3V 6.3V 50V 25V 25V 25V 6.3V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 50V 16V 25V 50V 50V 6.3V 25V 25V 25V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 16V 16V Ref. No. Part No. Description < FILTER > FL101 FL102 FL103 FL104 FL105 FL106 FL108 FL201 FL501 FL502 FL505 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-233-893-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI FILTER, CHIP EMI Remark

1-234-177-21 FILTER, CHIP EMI < IC >

IC001 IC002 IC003 IC004 IC101 IC102 IC103 IC107 IC108 IC202 IC301 IC302 IC303 IC401 IC501 IC502 IC503 IC504 IC505 IC601 IC801 IC802 IC901 IC902 IC903

8-759-837-36 8-759-271-88 8-759-683-76 8-759-271-88 8-759-641-86

IC IC IC IC IC

CXD9606Q TC7SHU04FU-TE85R K4S161622D-TC80T TC7SHU04FU-TE85R BR24C16F-E2

8-759-831-81 IC IMIC6001BTD 8-759-829-75 IC MB91307APFV-G-BND-E1 Note Note 8-759-828-02 IC SP3728AC 8-759-832-31 8-759-828-01 8-759-643-10 8-759-826-42 8-759-832-30 8-759-599-45 8-752-409-87 8-759-683-76 8-759-683-76 8-759-826-44 8-759-825-34 8-759-825-32 8-759-837-11 6-700-253-01 8-759-599-45 IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC TK71533ASCL CXD9635R GM71V18160CT-6TR FAN8034 TK71518ASCL MM1385ENLE CXD1933Q K4S161622D-TC80T K4S161622D-TC80T CXD9632Q CXD9626Q CXD9627N-E2 CXD9649R ADV7199KS MM1385ENLE

1-162-923-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-107-826-11 CERAMIC CHIP < CONNECTOR >

CN101 * CN103 CN201 CN202 CN402 CN801 CN902

1-815-459-21 1-770-470-21 1-815-507-11 1-779-935-11 1-779-353-21

CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 15P PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 6P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 26P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 9P CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P

< COIL > L201 L202 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH 1-412-031-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 47uH < TRANSISTOR > Q201 Q202 Q901 Q902 Q903 Q904 Q905 Q906 Q907 8-729-903-46 8-729-903-46 8-729-230-49 8-729-230-49 8-729-230-49 8-729-216-22 8-729-216-22 8-729-216-22 8-729-230-49 TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR < RESISTOR > R001 1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP 10 5% 1/16W 2SB1132-T100-QR 2SB1132-T100-QR 2SC2712-YG-TE85L 2SC2712-YG-TE85L 2SC2712-YG-TE85L 2SA1162-YG-TE85L 2SA1162-YG-TE85L 2SA1162-YG-TE85L 2SC2712-YG-TE85L

1-815-396-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 25P 1-779-935-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 9P < FERRITE BEAD >

FB102 FB103 FB104 FB105 FB106 FB107 FB108 FB109 FB110

1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-324-21 1-469-784-11 1-469-324-21

FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE FERRITE

0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH 0uH

8-9

Note: Part number has not been determined yet. It will be noticed later.

MB-100
Ref. No. R002 R003 R004 R005 R006 R007 R008 R009 R010 R011 R012 R013 R014 R015 R016 R017 R018 R020 R021 R022 R023 R024 R025 R026 R027 R028 R029 R030 R031 R032 R033 R034 R035 R036 R037 R038 R039 R040 R041 R042 R043 R044 R045 R046 R047 R048 R049 R050 R051 R052 R053 R054 R055 R056 R057 R058 R059 R060 R061 R062 Part No. 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 100 100 10 10 22 10 10 10K 10K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 100K 0 10K 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10K 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10K 10 10K 10K 10 10 10K 10 10 10K 10K 10K 0 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% Remark 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W Ref. No. R063 R064 R065 R066 R067 R068 R069 R070 R071 R072 R073 R074 R075 R076 R101 R106 R107 R109 R111 R112 R113 R114 R116 R117 R118 R119 R121 R123 R124 R125 R126 R127 R128 R129 R130 R133 R134 R135 R136 R137 R138 R141 R142 R143 R145 R146 R148 R151 R152 R153 R155 R156 R160 R161 R162 R163 R164 R165 R166 R167 Part No. 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-789-11 1-216-789-11 1-216-789-11 1-216-828-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-801-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-789-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-820-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-081-00 1-216-827-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-817-11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 22 22 22 22 22 22 2.2 2.2 2.2 3.9K 0 0 22 22 2.2 10K 820 10 470 1K 10K 100K 10K 1K 1K 10K 10K 10K 10 10 10 10 3.3K 10K 10K 10K 10K 10 10 10 10 10 10 10K 10K 10K 4.7K 3.3K 22K 3.3K 3.3K 10K 10K 0 10K 10K 100 100 470 0 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% Remark 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/10W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

1-216-801-11 METAL CHIP

1-216-295-91 SHORT

8-10

MB-100
Ref. No. R168 R170 R177 R178 R182 R199 R201 R202 R203 R204 R205 R206 R207 R208 R209 R210 R211 R212 R215 R216 R219 R220 R223 R224 R225 R229 R237 R238 R245 R246 R299 R301 R302 R305 R306 R307 R308 R309 R310 R311 R312 R313 R314 R315 R316 R317 R318 R319 R320 R321 R328 R329 R330 R334 R335 R336 R337 R338 R341 R342 Part No. 1-216-295-91 1-216-821-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-826-11 1-216-815-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-837-11 1-216-845-11 1-216-838-11 1-216-803-11 1-216-803-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-803-11 1-216-803-11 1-216-801-11 1-216-841-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-834-11 1-216-861-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-847-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-827-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-817-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-831-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-817-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-218-871-11 1-218-855-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-809-11 1-218-879-11 1-218-871-11 Description SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 0 1K 10 10 100K 2.7K 330 100 100 22K 100K 27K 33 33 1K 47K 100 0 0 0 0 33 33 22 47K 100 12K 2.2M 100 3.3K 150K 3.3K 3.3K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 470 470 470 4.7K 10K 0 6.8K 0 470 10K 0 0 10K 2.2K 10K 100 22K 10K 33K 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% Remark 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W Ref. No. R343 R344 R345 R349 R350 R351 R352 R356 R368 R384 R385 R402 R403 R404 R405 R406 R407 R408 R409 R410 R411 R412 R413 R414 R415 R416 R417 R418 R419 R420 R421 R422 R423 R424 R425 R426 R427 R428 R429 R430 R431 R432 R433 R434 R435 R436 R439 R507 R510 R511 R512 R513 R514 R515 R516 R517 R518 R519 R521 R522 Part No. 1-218-831-11 1-218-847-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-838-11 1-216-822-11 1-216-825-11 1-216-825-11 1-218-853-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-829-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-846-11 1-216-846-11 1-216-847-11 1-216-847-11 1-216-842-11 1-216-842-11 1-216-850-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-853-11 1-216-846-11 1-216-855-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-853-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-839-11 1-216-849-11 1-216-853-11 1-218-895-11 1-216-839-11 1-218-889-11 1-218-895-11 1-218-889-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-815-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-809-11 1-216-833-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-218-831-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-822-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT 220 1K 10K 27K 1.2K 2.2K 2.2K 1.8K 4.7K 10 4.7K 10K 10K 1K 1K 120K 120K 150K 150K 56K 56K 270K 10K 470K 120K 680K 10K 33K 33K 470K 33K 33K 33K 33K 220K 470K 100K 33K 56K 100K 56K 10K 10K 330 10K 100 0 100 10K 220 220 220 220 220 220 10K 1.2K 0 0 3.3K 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% Remark 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

1-218-883-11 METAL CHIP

1-216-827-11 METAL CHIP

5%

1/16W

8-11

MB-100
Ref. No. R524 R525 R533 R548 R549 R554 R604 R803 R804 R805 R807 R901 R902 R903 R904 R905 R907 R908 R909 R910 R911 R912 R913 R914 R915 R916 R917 R918 R919 R920 R921 R922 R923 R924 R925 R926 R927 R928 R929 R930 R931 R932 R933 R934 R935 R936 R937 R938 R939 R940 R941 R942 R943 R944 R946 R947 R948 R951 R952 R953 Part No.

MS-81
Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT SHORT SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 10K 10K 10 0 0 10 100 0 0 100 0 10 100 100 100 10 100 100 100 100 100 100 10K 10K 10K 0 10 10 10 10 100 10 10 10 10 10 100 10 100 10 10 10 10 10 10 1K 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 0 0 10 10 10 5% 5% 5% Remark 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W Ref. No. R954 R955 R956 R957 R958 R959 R960 R961 R962 R963 R964 R965 R966 R968 R969 R971 R972 R973 R975 R976 R977 R978 R979 R980 R981 R983 R984 R985 R986 R987 R988 R989 Part No. 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-825-11 1-216-789-11 1-218-834-11 1-218-834-11 1-218-834-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 100 0 100 100 2.2K 2.2 300 300 300 1K 1K 1K 1K 1K 100 100 10K 1K 0 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% Remark 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-797-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-809-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-797-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-833-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-809-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-821-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-295-91 1-216-797-11 1-216-797-11

5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W

5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5% 5% 5% 5% 0.5% 0.5% 0.5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

1-216-833-11 METAL CHIP 1-216-821-11 METAL CHIP 1-216-295-91 SHORT

< VARIABLE RESISTOR > RV501 RV901 1-223-583-11 RES, ADJ, CARBON 1K (VIDEO LEVEL ADJ) 1-223-582-11 RES, ADJ, CARBON 470 (PROG VIDEO LEVEL ADJ) < VIBRATOR > X001 X101 X102 \ MS-81 BOARD ************ (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) < CONNECTOR > CN001 1-815-412-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 5P < SWITCH > S001 1-786-133-11 SWITCH, ROTARY (CHUCK/TRAY DETECT) 1-795-251-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (66MHz) 1-795-174-11 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (16.5MHz) 1-781-950-11 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (27MHz)

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

5% 5% 5%

1/16W 1/16W 1/16W

1-216-797-11 METAL CHIP

8-12

POWER BLOCK
Ref. No. * Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description < IC > IC301 IC411 8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T 8-759-420-19 IC AN1431T < COIL > 0 C101 0 C107 C110 C115 C116 C117 C150 C211 C213 C221 C223 C301 C311 C313 C314 C413 C414 C511 C513 C611 C613 C711 1-115-165-11 1-113-937-11 9-885-012-85 1-130-489-11 1-130-483-11 1-130-477-11 9-885-012-86 1-111-083-11 1-126-947-11 1-111-082-11 1-126-947-11 1-126-961-11 1-111-087-11 1-126-947-11 1-126-965-11 1-126-947-11 1-130-483-11 1-111-082-11 1-126-947-11 1-111-087-11 FILM CERAMIC ELECT FILM FILM FILM CERAMIC ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT FILM ELECT ELECT ELECT 0.1uF 2200PF 120uF 0.033uF 0.01uF 0.0033uF 470PF 150uF 47uF 100uF 47uF 2.2uF 330uF 47uF 22uF 47uF 0.01uF 100uF 47uF 330uF 47uF 47uF 250V 250V 200V 50V 50V 50V 1KV 35V 35V 35V 35V 50V 35V 35V 50V 35V 50V 35V 35V 35V 35V 35V 0 L101 L150 L211 L221 L311 L511 L611 9-885-012-78 9-885-012-79 9-885-012-80 9-885-012-81 9-885-012-80 LINE FILTER BEAD CORE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE COIL, CHOKE 18mH 120 39uH 100uH 39uH 100uH 39uH 1-468-583-11 POWER BLOCK (HS13S0U) ********************* (Ref. No. 5,000 Series) < CAPACITOR >

RM-85
Remark

9-885-012-81 COIL, CHOKE 9-885-012-80 COIL, CHOKE <IC LINK >

0 P311 0 P611

9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) 9-885-012-82 LINK, IC (1A/60V) < PHOTO COUPLER >

0 PC101

9-995-566-01 PHOTO COUPLER PS2501 < TRANSISTOR >

1-126-947-11 ELECT 1-126-947-11 ELECT < CONNECTOR >

Q101 Q102 Q211 Q311 Q411 Q611 Q621 Q622 Q712

9-885-006-10 8-729-023-98 9-885-005-96 9-885-006-08 9-885-006-08 9-885-006-08 8-729-901-41 8-729-029-92 8-729-029-92

TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR < SWITCH >

2SK2750 2SC3377 2SJ525 2SD1768S 2SD1768S 2SD1768S 2SC1740S DTC143ES DTC143ES

0 CN101 * CN201

1-580-230-11 CONNECTOR 2P 1-778-318-21 CONNECTOR 13P < DIODE >

0 D101 D104 D105 D211 D212 D221 D311 D413 D511 D611 D621

9-885-000-79 8-719-062-66 9-903-904-01 8-719-018-83 8-719-160-87 8-719-510-02 8-719-510-02 9-998-285-01 8-719-510-02 8-719-510-02

DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE

S1WBA60 HZS2C3-TE 1SS270A D2S4M RD33FB2 D1NS4 D1NS4 D1N60 D1NS4 D1NS4

0 SW101 9-885-012-83 SWITCH (POWER) < TRANSFORMER > 0 T101 9-885-012-87 TRANSFORMER

A-6065-698-A RM-85 BOARD, COMPLETE ********************** (Ref.No. 1,000 Series) < CAPACITOR >

8-719-064-11 DIODE SPR-325MVW (ON/STANDBY) < FUSE > C501 C502 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1-104-660-91 ELECT < CONNECTOR > CN501 1-815-381-11 CONNECTOR, FPC/FFC 5P < DIODE > D501 < EARTH TERMINAL > < IC > 8-719-056-06 DIODE SLR-342DCT32 (PROGRESSIVE) 0.01uF 47uF 10% 20% 25V 16V

0 F101

1-533-296-11 FUSE (2A/125V) < FUSE CLIP >

FC1 FC2

9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP 9-885-012-77 FUSE CLIP

FG101 FG201

1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH 1-537-738-21 TERMINAL, EARTH

IC501

8-749-019-11 IC GP1UD28SYK

8-13

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

RM-85
Ref. No. Part No. Description < RESISTOR > R501 R502 R503 1-216-097-11 RES-CHIP 1-216-017-91 RES-CHIP 1-216-033-00 METAL CHIP 100K 47 220 5% 5% 5% 1/10W 1/10W 1/10W Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

MISCELLANEOUS ************** 9 0 56 62 63 64 65 71 72 0 104 1-476-714-11 1-757-571-11 1-757-798-11 1-757-693-11 1-757-694-11 1-757-697-11 1-757-800-11 1-757-804-11 8-820-144-06 ENCODER, ROTARY CORD, POWER CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FIR-003) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-001) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMO-002) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMM-035) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMA-029) CABLE, FLEXIBLE FLAT (FMAV-003) OPTICAL PICK-UP KHM-240AAA/J1RP

ACCESSORIES & PACKING MATERIALS ******************************* 1-476-605-21 COMMANDER, STANDARD (RMT-D129A) 1-751-271-12 CORD, CONNECTION (STEREO AV CABLE 1.5m) 3-068-059-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH) 3-068-059-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH, FRENCH) (Canadian)

8-14 8-14E

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifis par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la scurit. Ne les remplacer que par une pice portant le numro spcifi.

DVP-NS700P

Sony Corporation
9-921-799-11
Home Video Company

146

2001D0500-1 2001. 4 Published by Quality Assurance Dept.